JP6703247B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Pachinko game machines.

In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered by a game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game ) The state is the mainstream Pachinko game machine that can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and a time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine which is provided with the above, and which enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

Patent No. 5536601 Patent No. 5527745

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that realizes further novel gaming property is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
According to the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to variably display the first identification information and then stop the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
According to the content determined based on the second random number, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop the second identification information. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
A unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific game state, and the one unit is predetermined. When played a number of times, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
It has a plurality of types of times set as the predetermined number of times,
When the unit from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display is one unit A and the unit from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit B,
In the specific gaming state, the one unit B is not performed, and when the one unit A is played a first predetermined number of times, it can be in the normal gaming state, while in the specific gaming state, the one unit A is Is configured to be in the normal game state even when the one unit B is played a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times,
It is possible to display an instruction effect for instructing the shooting direction of the game ball on a predetermined effect display unit,
The instruction effect A and the instruction effect B are provided as the instruction effects, and the instruction effect A and the instruction effect B indicate the same firing direction but have different display modes.
The instruction effect A can be displayed during execution of the variable winning opening opening game, but the instruction effect A cannot be displayed during execution of the second special game, while the instruction effect B can be displayed. being configured,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, not only the instruction effect A but also the instruction effect B can be displayed at the same time, and the instruction effect A and the instruction effect B are displayed during the execution of the variable prize opening game. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the instruction display A and the instruction display B are not overlapped when they are displayed at the same time .

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an operation diagram relating to the second big winning opening of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram relating to the electric accessory of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the distribution combination object control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the remaining time saving display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the time saving medium right hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is completed. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of special game in-progress production control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is an image diagram related to the special game effect in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a table configuration diagram on the auxiliary game side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the sixth embodiment pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of pending information management/pending display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of a sub game display content determination process for an auxiliary game on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. 81 is a sub game table configuration diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination process for an auxiliary game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a sub game display control process for an auxiliary game on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the hold information pre-determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of a sub game display area size change control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number. Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning/non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine the stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether or not to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after the special game, etc. be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including the winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number... Is called one random number). .. Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. High probability of random selection game state, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth) In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notification of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first type, second type, third type, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). .. Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, The present invention is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood to be modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described separately It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery table and a reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa.

Here, prior to a detailed description of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, a simple configuration according to the present invention will be described.

Of the pachinko game machine according to this example, the small hit winning probability relating to the second main game is set to a high probability, and during the small hit game, a game ball can be almost certainly entered into the V winning opening, In addition, a configuration for determining the game state after the special game related to the small hit based on the game state at the time of winning the small hit related to the second main game will be described in detail in this embodiment.

Of the pachinko game machine according to this example, the configuration of (the present embodiment), the number of time saving given after the end of the special game may be different depending on the big hit symbol, and whether the big hit symbol is the first main game symbol or not. A configuration in which the expected value of the saved time is changed depending on whether it is two main game symbols will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the present embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, when the small hit is won in the time shortening game state due to the configuration of (the present embodiment), the player once shoots the game ball to the special winning opening (right-handed). ) Is stopped, and a modified configuration that can notify the number of times saved when the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from the present embodiment). .

In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, when the special game related to the second main game hold ends and the time shortened game state is entered, the second main game hold occurs again up to the upper limit number, and the game is played again. A configuration for executing a seamless effect in a period in which a payout is continuously given to a person will be described in detail in (second embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, when a big hit (a big hit pattern stops or a game ball enters the V winning opening), then enter the game ball into a certain entrance The configuration in which the special game is started will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

Of the pachinko game machine according to this example, the limited frequency table that can be referred to after the special game is finished, and the limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol stopped immediately before the execution of the special game. A configuration in which the number that can cause the second main game hold differs depending on the variation time of the second main game symbol will be described in detail in (third embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, a configuration similar to that of (third embodiment) is realized by changing the table for determining the variation mode referred to by the number of holdings without using the limited frequency ( This will be described in detail in a modified example 1) from the third embodiment.

Among the pachinko game machines according to this example, a configuration having one second-type non-electric accessory is described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, a configuration having two second type non-electric accessory is described in detail in (Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment).

Of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, a configuration in which a V winning opening is not provided and a probability varying gaming state exists will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, two auxiliary game starting ports are provided, and in a non-time shortened gaming state, a configuration is possible in which the second main game starting port electric auditors can be opened long (Sixth embodiment ) Will be described in detail.

Among the pachinko game machines according to this example, a configuration capable of executing parallel lottery will be described in detail in (Seventh Embodiment).

(This embodiment)
Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball dish D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the left and right of the upper portion of the game machine, and a sound effect according to the game state and the like is output.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of game nails and mechanisms (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball. Generates mouth entrance information.

Next, the second main game starting opening B10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game starting entrance B10, and the second main game start indicating the entrance when entering the ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state (however,). Since the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment has a mode different from the well-known tulip type, its details will be described later).

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged apart from each other, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). However, while it is easy to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is the first main game. While being difficult to be guided to the starting opening A10, it is configured to be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information that indicates the entering ball when entering. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided (however, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is arranged above the outlet D36, and the second big winning opening C20 is arranged above the outlet D36 to the right of the game area D30 (in the center of the game area). The game ball flowing down (reference) is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by a big hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is in the shape of a horizontal rectangle and is located above the outlet D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first special winning opening electric auditors C11d (and the first big winning Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering when entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won in the first big winning opening C10 or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first winning hole C10). (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in this embodiment, the first special winning opening electric prize C11d is a plate-like member, and substantially influences the flowing down direction of the game ball flowing down the game area D30 so as to close the first special winning opening C10. The state in which the game ball is closed in a form that does not give to the player is in a normal state, and the first big winning opening C10 is opened, and the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area D30 is changed toward the opening side toward the player side. The tilted state is the open state (that is, a so-called general attacker mode).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by a small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). The state is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the right of the outlet D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second special winning Mouth solenoid C24) and inside, to the V winning opening C22 and the V winning opening C22, which are the triggers for executing a special game (in this embodiment, a game in which the first big winning opening C10 is in an open state) to be described later. V prize entrance detecting device C22s which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and whether the game ball entered in the second prize hole C20 is directly discharged to the outside of the second prize hole C20 or not. And a sorting accessory C23 for sorting whether or not to once guide to C22. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. It is made variable (the second special winning opening solenoid C24 is excited and made variable). In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is a flat member like the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d, but the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d is variable. Unlike the above, it adopts a mode in which it is variable in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second special winning opening electric part C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). The state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as the advancing state) is taken until it comes close to the board D16. Then, the second special winning opening electric auditors' product C21d is a box-shaped member C20-1 (a game entered in this box-shaped member, which can receive a game ball protruding from the game board (game area D30) and flowing down the game area D30. The ball serves as a lid for the second special winning opening C20, that is, when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended) While the game ball can enter the second special winning opening C20), when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second The game ball cannot enter the special winning opening C20) (the box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, whether the gaming ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is directly discharged to the outside of the second special winning opening C20 by the distribution winning object C23 or is once guided to the V winning opening C22. It is configured to be distributed.

Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C22 and plays a role of producing (notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C22) by lighting.

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 types of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with a symbol or the like. Further, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, the number of holdings is one lamp. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set so that it is inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), a later-described effect A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image display including a decorative pattern that fluctuates/stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol/second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect including a variable display of a decorative symbol and the like is executed. Here, the display area SG10 is a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols that mimics a game of a slot machine, for example, with a first holding display unit SG12 (and a second holding display unit SG13) that displays main game holding information. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations not executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by blinking or the like.

The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, but prior to the description of the characteristic parts of the present embodiment, the contents of the game developed on this game board will be outlined. First, the game ball shot toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left hitting route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), or It is roughly divided into two, namely, to flow down a flow-down route formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) (hereinafter, also referred to as right-handed route). Here, the game ball flowing down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game starting opening A10 or the first big winning opening C10, while the game ball flowed down the right-handed route is an auxiliary There is an opportunity to enter the game starting opening H10, the second big winning opening C20, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big winning opening C10 more easily than the game ball flowed down on the left-handed route (“enter ball”). "Easy" and "difficult to enter" are determined, for example, by the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.)

Also, on the left-handed route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game starting opening A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. While adopting various flow-down modes, on the right-handing route (not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is small compared to the left-handing route, and a flow-down mode in which the game balls are substantially uniform is provided. take.

More specifically, regarding the right-handed route, first, a game ball that is shot aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launch strength of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) , Flying in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and falling by its own weight by colliding with a stopper member (member made of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) To start. Next, the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game starting opening H10 immediately below it with a high probability, and then has a flow path width of more than one game ball and less than two game balls. It is collected in D50 (collected regardless of whether or not it entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the straightening passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50, and is then slightly tilted leftward with respect to the horizontal direction. After being rolled on each of the first, second-stage passage D51-2, and third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second special winning opening electric prize C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed in advance to the game board. That is, when the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first special winning opening electric prize C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50. The game ball released from rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball discharged from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is discharged toward the outlet D36. , And the substantially uniform flow-down mode.

In this way, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route has a substantially uniform flow-down mode, so if you continuously shoot a game ball toward the right-handed route (one at a 0.6 second interval) When the ball stably enters the game starting opening H10 and the second winning a prize electric accessory C21d is in the open state (withdrawal state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (then the second large winning opening) It is possible to stably enter the inside of C20) and to stably enter the first special winning opening C10 when the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened. In addition, in the space until the game ball discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, the second main game starting port electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game starting port electric auditors' item B11d is in the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game starting port B10. However, this point will be described later.

Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second special winning opening electric auditorium C21d in the advanced state. If so, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d may be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the flow control passage D50, it is important to have a configuration for cutting off the momentum of the game ball that has flowed down (substantially dropped) in the flow control passage D50. In the present embodiment, as illustrated near the outlet of the flow regulating passage D50, the flow passage wall of the flow regulating passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the flow regulating passage D50, and by this shape, the inside of the flow regulating passage D50 is a game ball. It is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by dropping zigzag. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the same reasoning is also provided with a configuration for cutting off the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1, but this point Will be described later.

Next, a configuration for cutting off the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, the first-stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction and is formed by the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The special winning opening electric accessory C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, so unless some measure is taken to reduce the momentum of the game ball, Even if the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {especially, a series of displacements of the advanced state → the retracted state → the advanced state are instantaneously performed (for example, about 0.1 seconds). When the game is performed}, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be properly guided to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension, the second special winning opening C20). Therefore, in the present embodiment, like the flow path shape provided near the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 are devised so as to move in a zigzag manner. .

More specifically, within the range in which the game balls roll on the first-stage passage D51-1, a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the game board surface side, and a plurality of them are also provided on the transparent plate D16 side. The protrusions D51-1-2 are provided, and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are alternately arranged. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be fixed directly to the game board surface, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 may be directly connected to the transparent plate D16 rear surface. Once fixed, if the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of game machine maintenance or the like, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are exposed to the outside, so maintenance There is a risk that a person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (at worst, peel off) (also, it becomes difficult to reuse the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine). .. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the present embodiment, the wall surface of the box-shaped member C20-1 on the transparent plate D16 side is the second special winning opening electric accessory that is in the advanced state. It is configured to extend upward from C21d and fix the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 to the wall surface of the elongated box-shaped member C20-1.

In this way, by providing a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and a plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range in which the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the game ball rolling on the passage D51-1 progresses in a zigzag manner, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to decrease. Here, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game ball emitted from the exit of the flow-rectifying passage D50 is reduced. Reaching the first-stage passage D51-1, and since the momentum of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, it is rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended). Can successfully guide the game ball to the second big winning opening C20). In addition, the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is decelerated, which means that when the game balls are continuously launched toward the right-handed route, the position intervals of those game balls are increased. Means that the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 becomes congested. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are present on the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1), and in this case, the second special winning combination. Even if the mouth electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of boxes are connected to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the second special winning opening C20). It is also possible to guide the individual game balls collectively (an image is shown in the lower part of the figure).

Next, an operation mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, in the space until the game balls discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reach the third stage passage D51-3, the second main state that can take the retracted state and the advanced state A game starting opening electric auditors' play B11d is provided (the meanings of the retracted state and the advancing state are the same as those of the second special winning opening electric prize C21d, but as will be described below, the second main game start. In the case of the mouth electric accessory B11d, when the advancing state is adopted, the game ball is easily opened into the second main game starting opening B10, and when the retracting state is adopted, the second main game starting opening B10 is played. The ball is in a closed state that is difficult to enter). Here, in this embodiment, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (open state) due to a special game property described later. Even if {especially, when a series of displacements in the retracted state→advanced state→retracted state are performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds)}, the second main game starting opening B10 enters the ball. It is configured so that it can be physically secured.

More specifically, the game ball that has rolled on the second stage passage D51-2 that is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and the third stage passage D51. It begins to fall toward -3 by its own weight. Here, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third-stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d itself can accept this falling game ball and the second main game. In addition to the shape that extends until reaching the starting opening B10, since it is installed so as to be slightly inclined to the horizontal direction, this falling game ball, the second main game starting opening B10 Starts rolling toward (the traveling direction of the game ball is switched from leftward to rightward as shown in the third tier of FIG. 3). When the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d maintains the advanced state until the game ball which has started rolling toward the second main game starting opening B10 reaches the second main game starting opening B10. In the meanwhile, while entering the second main game starting port B10 as it is, while the game ball that started rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 reaches the second main game starting port B10, When the 2 main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d is displaced to the retracted state, it will drop toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game starting mouth B10 (the same figure). The following game ball in the 4th stage corresponds).

In the case of such a configuration, the period required for the game ball started rolling toward the second main game starting opening B10 to reach the second main game starting opening B10 is about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds. By designing so that even if the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d in the retracted state is momentarily displaced to the advanced state, {especially, the retracted state→the advanced state→the retracted state It is possible to physically ensure that the player does not enter the second main game starting opening B10 when the series of displacements are instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 second)}.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (ie, the game Main control board M that performs (control directly related to the profit of the person), and production control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various productions on the production display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winning in each prize hole, an upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. A launcher D42 that launches one ball at a time to the area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launcher D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a power supply for the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on and off, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as the change/stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation/stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display/stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, and hold display and notice display. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a program etc. modified by an illegal act from being written. It is suitable (for example, the unused area is filled with all 0s, the used area is written in a young address, and the like). In addition, in order to prevent you from referring to data that you do not normally refer to due to noise or fraudulent activity, you can use unused data (for example, data that is referred to by game machines with different specifications or used only for testing in the development stage). It is preferable to configure so as not to provide the data etc.). Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the young address and the unused program area is not provided. The schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate/device will be outlined below.

First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, the general winning opening is a winning opening, but there is no prize lottery ,), drive solenoids (not shown) (the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C24, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), and the like, which are indispensable for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM/sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize-ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to the above can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production/game progress state and the like can be transmitted to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board are provided. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by a player, and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) is also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately from the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and the other effect drive device (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub controller SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, by executing the voice control by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first/second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect, the prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, and is communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (production display means SS) that executes image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of a ROM, a RAM, an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

First, the main control board M, game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of information for the game, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, the progress of games such as special games and specific games. The game progression means MP that controls the current game state and the past game state [for example, a state related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), special game state}, state related to auxiliary game (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on/off state of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] The game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, etc., and various game information on the game peripheral side {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol {for example, 15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} , Information about variation mode (for example, variation time), information transmission control means MT for transmitting special game start signal/state information/end signal, hold information, etc. (and command transmission buffer for accumulating untransmitted commands) MT10) and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on winning of game balls into various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like), and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entering each starting opening during variable display as a reserved ball within the upper limit number. is doing. Further, the game progression means MP is a display control means MP10 for performing control to display fluctuations and stop display of each symbol, and directly to open and close the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. A second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the second big prize without deciding which game state the current game state is to be transitioned to and transitioning the game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) It has a small hitting game control means MP40 which controls the execution of a small hitting game that can open the mouth C20, and a specific game control means MP50 which performs a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 is a first main game start opening entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10, and a second main game launch opening. A second main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game starting opening for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10. To the first winning a prize entrance judging means MJ11-C10 and the second winning a prize mouth C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning a prize mouth CJ11-H Second winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a gaming ball entered, and for determining whether or not a gaming ball entered a V winning opening C22, a V winning entrance The determination means MJ11-V is included.

Next, the random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-A for acquiring a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main number) according to the determination result. Second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B for acquiring game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result. Random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H.

Here, the “random number” in the claims and the specification including the above description is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “allocated” according to the type of random number (eg, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing values along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears. ) Is defined by a random value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like. By obtaining a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult for a player to expect. On the contrary, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number by using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30, the hold digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the process related to hold digestion and variation start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol variation permission has not come down. It is determined whether to temporarily store, based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission comes down. -A, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in the situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been obtained, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result. Until the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation that the auxiliary game symbol variation permission is not down temporarily It is determined whether or not to store, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission comes down. Have

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. In order to temporarily store in the form, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively. Have

Next, the game content determination means MN, and the winning/unwinning lottery means MN10 that draws the win/fail of the special game and the availability of opening the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d, and the special game when the win/win lottery result is a win. Special game transition determining means MN20 that makes a transition determination (for example, the hit flag is turned on internally), variation fixing control means MN30 for determining and managing the variation fixed time relating to the main game symbol, and each random number Based on, the symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol, the variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number, and the sorting role It has a distribution winning combination control means MN60 for controlling the drive of the object C23, and a V winning opening control means MN70 for controlling the processing relating to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C22. Here, the win/loss lottery means MN10 is a first main game win/loss lottery means MN11-A for performing win/win lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game win/loss lottery means for performing win/loss lottery on the second main game symbol. It has an MN11-B and an auxiliary game win/loss lottery means MN11-H for performing a win/win lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game win/loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win/win lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win/win lottery means MN11-H are referred to when the win/win lottery about the first main game symbol is performed. First main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A, and second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when performing win/win lottery on the second main game symbol, and win/win lottery on the auxiliary game symbol Each has an auxiliary game win/loss table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. Further, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 has a fluctuation fixing time timer MN30t for measuring the fluctuation fixing time.

Here, when executing the winning/winning lottery based on the main game random number, the winning/winning lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the hit random number values, or When some or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, it is determined whether or not the main game random number value is less than or equal to the upper limit value of the hit random number value and greater than or equal to the lower limit value, to thereby determine whether or not the random number is valid. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by performing such a hit/miss determination. On the contrary, in the case of performing the judgment of acceptance by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023). Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits of the storage area easily become 0 or 1). There is a risk of In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {if a plurality of random numbers is used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Must be prevented from synchronizing}.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and acquisition Based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/losing result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→first main game normal game state) (Lottery table, probability variation game->first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game->first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/discarding result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the gaming state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number). It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. Therefore, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to winning/losing results and game states (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→first main game normal (Lottery table for gaming state, time-reduced game → first main game time-reduced gaming state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the winning/discarding result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→second main game normal game) (Lottery table for state, time-reducing game → second main game time-reducing game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the gaming state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, time-reducing game→auxiliary game time shortening lottery table).

Further, the distribution combination object control means MN60 measures the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b for temporarily storing information relating to the operation timing of the distribution combination object, and the distribution time measuring operation time of the distribution combination object C23. It has a component operation timer MN60t.

Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. On the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g of the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 for controlling the stop display after changing the first main game symbol, a predetermined time assistance It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling the stop display after changing the game symbol.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening/closing the second main gaming starting entrance electric auditors object B11d is satisfied. Second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d. -B and.

Next, the special game control means MP30, the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the special game transition condition is satisfied, the contents of the special game (Concretely, the special winning opening in the open state, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) is determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second special winning opening C20 under predetermined conditions, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening) C10 and the special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the second special winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 is the first and second special winning opening electric auditors opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d and the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d. , Has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table. Details are not shown).

Next, the small hit game control means MP40, a small hit game timer MP41t for measuring the opening time of the first big winning opening C10 in the small hit game, and a discharge standby timer for managing the discharge standby time in the small hit game. It has MP41t-2 and a small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b for temporarily storing information related to the small hit game.

Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the probability variation game state end condition is satisfied, and whether or not the time reduction game state end condition is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game in which the probability of being drawn to a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reducing game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time reduction. function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game without time saving limit). except for). That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation game end condition determining means MP51 and the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a symbol variation. It may have a function of performing (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine having a falling lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB, the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop) First/second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, ON/OFF of various flags regarding the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of hours saved, ON/OFF of various flags relating to the specific game). .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the currently changing first or second main game symbol (first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is an auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (the auxiliary game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the production controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 that can display and stop the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first/second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control section) SM, the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the determination processing and the display control processing of the effect content related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 for controlling the above, and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub controller SS side. The above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing the symbol information and the display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the determination process and the display control process of the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the holding of the design that controls the retained number management and the retained display process of the decorative symbol. The information display control means SM22, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, the notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the notice effect content determination process and the display control process, and the reach effect content. Reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the determination process and the display control process, and a display control process of a right-handing instruction display (a display that prompts the player to right-hand, a first right-handing instruction display and a second right-handing instruction display) It has a right hitting instruction display control means SM26 that controls the V hit detection display effect, and a V winning detection effect display control means SM27 that controls the display control process of the V prize detection effect.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M, and is related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol, and the design display content determining means SM21n that determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol. Design information related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop design information, various flags, etc.), and a design variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative design. ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

Next, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 has a drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding suspension related to the decorative symbol.

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information on the background effect display and the background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. And background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for.

Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the display content and the display timing of the notice effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and information related to the notice effect display. And a preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the display content of the reach effect, the display timing, etc., and the information regarding the reach effect display. Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, a sub information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub main control unit SM side, and an image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. And a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control section SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub-game control It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

From here, an example of the flow of general processing in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flow chart is mainly composed of processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start/end/return, etc. (shown by rounded rectangles). . Further, in the case where details are shown in another flowchart among the processing steps, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle whose left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, in the game machine development stage, game machines with different specifications are also being developed at the same time. In this example, however, a subroutine (a subroutine to be executed by the game machines with different specifications is executed in the main process). Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, so that processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or cheating.

First, FIG. 7 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits the ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing. Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1002, at step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is present). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM). If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M stores various data stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power interruption. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and the control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in the present example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 10B is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1018. . Note that after step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

The initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured so as not to be the value at which the special game is executed (noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Therefore, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game has been executed).

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric auditors product drive determination processing described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a later-described special game operating condition determination process. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes a distribution combination object control process described later. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes a V winning opening entry determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc. based on the winning opening in which the game ball wins). The payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, etc. for managing the result) (in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on one winning in the first main game starting opening A10 is “3”). The number of prize balls based on one prize in the second main game starting opening B10 is "3", the number of prize balls based on one prize in the first major prize winning opening C10 is "15", the second The prize ball payout control process is executed with the number of prize balls based on one prize in the special winning opening C20 as "3". Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was. In the control command transmission process, the order of receiving commands on the sub-main control section SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). Therefore, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M decides to transmit the commands (the order in which the commands are set).

Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. To be done. That is, when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflowed or passed in the case of a gate) in the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether the holding balls are not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). To determine. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a random number in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with information indicating how many pieces are held. Is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric auditors opening flag is OFF. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball for the auxiliary game symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). Along with the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time saving flag When is ON, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is OFF) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H, based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag), the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time related to the variation time (for example, 0.1 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on (that is, a time shorter than the game ball firing interval of 0.6 seconds), and when the auxiliary game short time flag is off. 10 seconds (that is, a time interval between game ball launches longer than 0.6 seconds)} is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball concerned with the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired assist. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit”. If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 2.0 seconds when the auxiliary game shortened flag is on, 0 when the auxiliary game shortened flag is off. . 12 seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric auditors opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d. Next, at step 1242, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B to determine the opening time of the electric auditors. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. If Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d, and the auxiliary gaming state temporarily. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the memory means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1242, in step 1243, the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B causes the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s to enter the second main game starting entrance. Based on the ball information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls has entered the second main game starting opening B10. If Yes in step 1243, the process proceeds to step 1244, and if No in step 1243, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300). In addition, in the case of No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, in the case of No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and in the case of No in steps 1206, 1224 and 1230, the next process (step 1300 Process).

Here, the relationship between the type of the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in the present embodiment and the opening mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is shown in the margin of the figure. In this embodiment, as the types of stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbol, there are a lost symbol "D0" and a hit symbol "D1", and when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off (in the non-time reduction game state) , While the lost symbol "D0" is almost definitely selected, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on (during the time shortening game state), the hit symbol "D1" is almost definitely selected. It is configured. Further, when the auxiliary game time shortening flag is off (during non-time shortening game state), when the hit symbol "D1" is stopped and displayed, the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is "0.12 seconds. While closed after "open", when the auxiliary game time shortening flag is on (during time shortening game state), when the hit symbol "D1" is stopped and displayed, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is closed after "opening for 2.0 seconds". However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is not a well-known tulip type, but a flat plate-like member provided so as to be buried in the game board surface is the player. Adopting a mode (so-called bello-type electric chew) that can take an advancing state that is a state that protrudes to the side and a retracted state that is a state that is retracted with respect to the player side, and the flat plate shape when in the advancing state It seems that it takes a period of about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds until the game ball that falls on the member rolls on the plate-shaped member and enters the second main game starting opening B10. It is configured. That is, if the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is "opened for 0.12 seconds" (≈ the period during which the flat member is maintained in the advanced state is 0.12 seconds), for example, Even if the 2 main game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened, the second main game starting port B10 is configured not to enter the ball. In addition, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d was scheduled to "open for 2.0 seconds" (≈ 2.0 seconds is the period during which the flat plate member is maintained in the advanced state). Also in the case, when there is a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls entering the second main game starting port B10, the second main game starting port electric auditors item B11d is closed, in other words, Since the flat plate-shaped member is in the retracted state before the period in which the flat-plate-shaped member is maintained in the advanced state has expired, for example, the subsequent game ball is on the flat-plate-shaped member (second main game). Even if it rolls (toward the start opening B10), the subsequent game ball will fall without reaching the second main game start opening B10. That is, even if the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is scheduled to perform "open for 2.0 seconds", the second main game starting port B10 has a predetermined number (one in this example). ) Is configured so that it is easy to ensure that only the incoming ball is generated.

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A determines the first main game starting entrance entering information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main starting opening A10. Is received. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (four in this example). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning/non-winning lottery random number for determining the win/fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing (note that, for example, only winning/abstracting random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, Others may be so-called software random numbers). Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 causes the newly generated hold-related command (hold number, held random number value, or a result of judgment based on the held random number value or a main result). Stop symbol of the game symbol and information relating to the variation mode, etc.) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to step 1312. Also, in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B determines the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main game starting entrance B10 from the second main game starting entrance. Determine whether information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1313, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B determines whether or not the predetermined error condition regarding the illegal ball entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is unsatisfied. To judge. Here, as described above, due to the configuration of the mode of the second main game starting port electric auditors' item B11d, in the present embodiment, in the non-time shortening gaming state (provisionally, the second main game starting port electric auditors item B11d). The second main game starting mouth B10d is scheduled to perform "2.0 seconds open" in the time shortening game state without entering the second main game starting mouth B10 (even if is opened) It is difficult to generate more than a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls in the second main game starting opening B10 (even if it is), so the predetermined error condition is this configuration. A condition for monitoring whether or not a ball has entered the second main game starting opening B10 contrary to the (design) is set. If Yes in step 1313, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (four in this example). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the win/fail lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game content determination means. By the way, the range of acquisition of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the range of acquisition of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning/unwinning random number for the first main game and the winning/unwinning random number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control unit MJ30 causes the newly generated hold-related command (hold number, hold random number value, or a result of judgment based on the hold random number value or a main result). Stop symbol of the game symbol and information relating to the variation mode, etc.) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1400).

Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1313, that is, the processing in the case where the predetermined error condition regarding the illegal ball entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is satisfied is not particularly limited, but for example, in the non-time shortening game state When there is a ball entering the second main game starting port B10, only the error notification is executed and the game progress is continued, while a predetermined number of the second main game starting port B10 (in the time shortening game state) ( For example, when there are more than 6 balls entered, an error notification may be executed and the game progress may be stopped (the processing subsequent to the processing is interrupted) (processing in step 1322). Is applicable). In addition, as the execution condition of the error notification, (1) when the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product B11d is opened once, from the time when the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product B11d is activated to the second main game. When there are more than a predetermined number (for example, 6) of balls entering the starting opening B10, (2) the second main game starting when the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is accumulated, which is accumulated during the game. When the number of balls entering the mouth B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3), (3) the second main game starting opening after the timing at which the error notification condition of (1) or (2) is satisfied Each time one game ball enters B10, it may be set.

Although the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1318, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information relating to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting lost). Further, for the winning/winning lottery random number, a change in the gaming state (from the already-recorded pending gaming state before the winning/winning lottery related to the winning/winning lottery random number is acquired after the winning/winning lottery random number is acquired. Not only the change but also the change in the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win/loss lot related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable), so the win/loss lot The lottery random number is stored until the process is executed.

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol does not exist. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (process of step 1600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400(2), the game content determination means MN executes the second main game symbol display processing described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

In this way, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of the hold ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the hold of the first main game symbol) It is configured to prioritize the execution of the second main game symbol on hold, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on the winning order or both main game symbols simultaneously in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the holding digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating) (for example, the special game execution flag described later is not on), and is not during the main game symbol fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation flag described later). Is not on), and there is a hold of the main game symbol, and is not in the small hit game (for example, the small hit execution flag to be described later is not on), and is not in a fixed fixed time (for example to be described later) The condition is that the fluctuation fixing flag is not on) and the like (in addition, as described above, the case where the progress of the game is not interrupted is also included in the condition).

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the holding digestion control means MJ31, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) Temporarily stored, while reading the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game The symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information that is temporarily stored is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1408, the win/loss lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning/winning lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of table for determining whether or not there is a win on the first main game side and the second main game side, that is, it has a so-called probability variation function. There is no feature (the feature of the present embodiment is that a plurality of big hits can be consecutively performed in a short period without having a probability variation function). Instead, in addition to a big hit (a so-called round (hereinafter, sometimes referred to simply as "R") can be executed a plurality of times) as a kind of hit, a small hit (so-called a round can be executed only once) As will be described later, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, a big hit is induced (even if the result of the hit determination is not a big hit). There is. The configuration for inducing this big hit may be realized on at least one of the first main game side and the second main game side, so the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a small hit is the first main game. It may be configured to occur in at least one of the tables on the side and the second main game side (however, as will be described later, in order to continue a plurality of big hits in a short period of time, the win/loss on the second main game side) It is preferable that the table for judgment is configured so that a small win is won). In the present embodiment, in particular, the second main game side is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (about 1/6) (provisionally, there are four reserves on the second main game side). If you do, if you win about 1/6 of the small hits, the expectation for winning the small hits is about 50% by the end of holding the 4 holdings.) Incidentally, the structure of the main game table 1 is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit on the first main game side, and it is not necessary to provide a gap on the second main game side.

Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination For lottery table MN41ta-B), refer to the main game symbol win/win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the design lottery random number) based on the stop symbol for the main game symbol Is determined and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 14 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game symbol is a big hit symbol from a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "7A" and "7B"). Is configured as. The number of rounds of the special game and the opening time of the special winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are "4A" jackpot for "7A" and "15R" jackpot for "7B". It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the special game related to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game related to the second main game are made different so that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game is made different. However, the number of rounds of the special game related to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game related to the second main game are both “15R”, and the opening mode of the special winning opening is different. By doing so, the number of game balls that can be acquired during the special game may be different.

Next, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) determines the first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta corresponding to each game state. -A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), with reference to the main game symbol win/loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the variation mode lottery The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on (random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 14 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, based on the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time saving flag state, the variation mode (variation) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a certain random number value (in particular, variation mode random number) Time) can be determined. For example, if the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a win (big hit, small hit) with respect to a certain random number value, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and the main game time saving flag is turned on. If it is (time saving game state), it is configured such that the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined (other characteristic items regarding the variation time will be described later). Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

Further, as shown in the figure, in this example, the variation time relating to the second main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state is 15 seconds when lost and 60 seconds when hit (big hit, small hit) 1 It is configured so that only the type of variation time is selected, and in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the same effect (the effect related to the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later) is provided in accordance with the variation time. It is configured to be executed (in the case of a hit, an effect for informing the hit is executed after the effect at the time of losing is executed). The configuration of the main game table 3 is not limited to this, and the shortest variation time on the first main game side in consideration of all game states, win/fail results and the number of holdings is the same as all game states and win/fail results. It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time on the side of the second main game in consideration of the number of holdings. For example, as the case of the shortest fluctuation time, a non-time shortened gaming state and a first In the case where the main game hold number is the maximum number and is missed (or the time shortened game state and is missed), the shortest variation time on the first main game side is set to "1 second", and the time shortened game state and the first The shortest fluctuation time on the second main game side may be set to "3 seconds" when the number of 2 main game holdings is the maximum number and is lost. Also, only the variation on the first main gaming side in the non-time-reduced game state, the type and selection rate of the variation time selection candidates depend on the main game holding number {others (for example, the first main game in the time-reduced game state. Side fluctuation, fluctuation of the second main gaming side in the non-time shortened gaming state, fluctuation of the second main gaming side in the time shortened gaming state) does not depend on the main game holding number}.

Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes a variable fixed time determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN, the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information regarding the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and a command regarding the current game state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1428.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1403, at step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C to change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1426, in step 1440, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation fixed flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1438 described later) is on. If Yes in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1441, and if No in step 1440, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol fluctuation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). Stop the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and display the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1436, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variable fixed time relating to the fluctuation determined in step 1450 in the variable fixed time timer MN30t, and starts the timer. To do. Next, in step 1438, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the variation fixed flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. , And shifts to step 1441.

Next, in step 1441, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the variable fixed time timer MN30t to determine whether the timer value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1441, in step 1442, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, which are being fixed. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1444. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1441, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1444, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. If Yes in step 1444, in step 1445, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are a jackpot symbol stop command {a command to execute a V winning detection effect described later, and the present embodiment. In, by performing the same effect as when the game ball wins the V winning opening C22, right-handed (the game ball is adjusted by adjusting the firing strength so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). Strike a ball) is intended to make the player feel the progress of the game at the time of execution as smooth} is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side ( It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1446, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1444, at step 1447, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1447, in step 1448, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1500. Even if No in step 1447, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1428, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the variable fixed control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game shortened flag is turned on (in other words, in the time shortened game state). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in an easily opened state and is in a state where it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10). If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the fluctuation fixed control means MN30 refers to the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C, and whether the fluctuation is fluctuation related to the second main gaming symbol. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C to determine whether or not the fluctuation is a small hit variation. judge. If Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a long time (30 seconds in this example), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418). To do. As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the variation related to the time reduction game state and the small hit on the second main game side, the time for causing the hold on the second main game side is secured (details will be described later). However, in the present embodiment, a large amount of game balls are obtained depending on whether or not the second main game side hold that is caused in the time-reduced game state is digested in the non-time-reduced game state and a small hit is won. Since it is a game property that decides whether or not it is possible, it is important to make sure that the second main game side holds up to the hold upper limit number in the time shortened game state). It is configured for a long time. In addition, the above-mentioned configuration of causing the second main game side to hold up to the holding upper limit number is not limited to this, during the small hitting game won in the time shortening game state (small hitting game start demonstration time, small hitting It may be configured to occur during the opening period of the second special winning opening C20 relating to the game), or may be configured to occur during the variation related to the small hit that is won in the time shortening gaming state.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, step 1454, or step 1456, in step 1462, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a short time (0.2 seconds in this example), and then Process (process in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts (decrements) the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1 in step 1504. Next, in a step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the hour/hour count counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining hour/hour count) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508 and step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then Process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the condition device operation flag (as described above, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit). It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol is stopped and displayed, but as will be described later, a flag that is turned on when there is a ball entering the V winning opening C22 when the small hit game is executed) It is determined whether or not is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 turns off the specific game flag (main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. To do. Next, in a step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c to zero. Next, at step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1700). Even if No in step 1602, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1700).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1702, at step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission has not been given, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1800).

Next, in a step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is OFF, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 first releases the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b with an opening pattern (for example, “29.0 seconds”). Open pattern). Next, in a step 1716, the special game executing means MP33 clears the value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in a step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 to open the first special winning opening C10, and the special game timer MP34t( In particular, the opening time timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes of steps 1714 to 1720.

Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control section SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in a step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (10 balls, for example) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10 in the round. judge. If Yes in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening is reached. It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. When the result in step 1726 is No, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1800).

Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 stops driving the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 to close the first special winning opening C10. Next, in a step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, at step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in a step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, a round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) indicating that the special game is to be ended in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in a step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determining process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (a process of step 1800). Even if No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and after the end of the special game related to the first main game side (first main game). Both after the special game related to the big hit symbol and after the special game related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C22 triggered by the stop of the first main game small hit symbol) are determined. To do. If Yes in step 1752, the process moves to step 1755. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in other words, when it is after the special game related to the second main game symbol is finished, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 is the first/second main game symbol information temporary storage means. Refer to MB11b-C, after the special game won in the time reduction game state (after the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol and to the V winning opening C22 triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol) (Including both after the special game relating to the entry of the game ball). If Yes in step 1754, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1800) (the game state becomes the non-time shortened game state), and if No in step 1754, the process proceeds to step 1755. As described above, in this embodiment, after the special game related to the first main game side is finished, the game state after the special game is finished is determined without depending on the game state at the time of the special game winning, while After the end of the special game related to the second main game side, the game state after the end of the special game is determined depending on the game state at the time of winning the special game.

Next, in a step 1755, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in step 1756 and step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1800 processing).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1801, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and is a discharge standby flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1822 described later, that is, the schedule. After the execution of the small hit game (particularly, the planned opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20), a waiting period for discharging the game balls remaining in the second special winning opening C20 (waiting for discharge) Flag) which is turned on during (time)) is turned off. If Yes in step 1801, in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1805, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the second big winning opening C20 of the round (in the present example, for example, in the case of the small hit symbol "2AK": 0.73 seconds open → close). In the case of small hit pattern "4AK": Repeat "Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 0.5 seconds" three times → Open for 0.13 seconds → Close, In case of small hit pattern "7AK": Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 5.87 seconds → Repeat "Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 0.87 seconds" twice → Open for 0.25 seconds → Close, in case of small hit symbol "BK": Open for 0.09 seconds → 5. 91 seconds closed → "0.09 seconds opened → 0.91 seconds closed" is repeated 5 times → 0.09 seconds opened → closed). Next, in a step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1807, the small hit game control means MP40, the distribution combination object operation start permission flag (the distribution combination object C23, which will be described later) in the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b. The flag that triggers the operation) is turned on. Next, in step 1808, in step 1810, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the second big winning opening C20 and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1809, the small hit game control means MP40 starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game, so that the discharge waits after a predetermined time (13 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hitting game. The time is configured to end {Of course, the method for measuring the discharge standby time is not limited to this, and for example, a scheduled small hit game (particularly, the scheduled opening of the second big winning opening C20) The measurement may be started after the completion of the execution of the pattern (in that case, if the discharge waiting time is uniform, in the case of the small hit pattern “2AK”, the small hit is made earlier than the others. The game will end)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 1802, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1810, the process moves to step 1812.

Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s, and determines whether or not there is a winning (winning) in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20. It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1814, the process moves to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (in this example, for example, small In case of winning symbol "2AK": 0.73 seconds open → close, in case of small winning symbol "4AK": repeat "0.13 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed" 3 times → open 0.13 seconds → close , Small hit pattern "7AK": 0.13 seconds open → 5.87 seconds closed → "0.13 seconds open → 0.87 seconds closed" repeated twice → 0.25 seconds open → closed, small hit In the case of the pattern "BK": Open for 0.09 seconds → Close for 5.91 seconds → Repeat "Open for 0.09 seconds → Close for 0.91 seconds" 5 times → Open for 0.09 seconds → Close, until) It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1818.

Next, in step 1818, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops driving the second special winning opening electric prize C21d and closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b (the discharge wait time is started from the timing of executing this process). Then, the process proceeds to step 1824. Even if No in step 1801, the process moves to step 1824.

Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the discharge standby timer MP41t-2, and determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). .. If Yes in step 1824, in step 1825, the small hit game control means MP40 clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the discharge standby flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). .. In addition, also in the case of No in step 1810, step 1816, or step 1824, the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the distribution combination object control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1902, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b and determines whether or not the distribution combination operation start permission flag is ON. .. In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the distribution combination object control means MN60 turns off the distribution combination object operation start permission flag in the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1906, the distribution combination object control means MN60 starts a distribution combination object operation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, in step 1908, the distribution combination object control means MN60 turns on the distribution combination object operating flag in the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1910, the distribution combination object control means MN60 moves the distribution combination object C23 to the second position, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1902, the process proceeds to step 1912. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution combination C23 is the first position as the initial position (the position where the portion where the game balls are stored is in the upward direction when viewed from the player, and In some cases, when a game ball enters the second special winning opening C20, the game ball that entered the ball is stopped at the position where the distribution winning combination C23 is stored. Further, the second position is a position where the portion where the game balls are stored is in the right direction when viewed from the player (when the game balls enter the second special winning opening C20 when the game balls are located at the position, It is the position where the game ball that entered the ball is not stored in the distribution winning combination C23).

Next, in step 1912, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b and determines whether or not the distribution combination object operating flag is ON. . In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the first operation value (the distribution combination object moves from the second position to the first position). It is a timer value that operates in one position, and is the same timing as the opening timing of the second big winning opening C20 for the second time during the small hit game related to the small hit symbol "7AK" and the small hit symbol "BK", In this example, it is determined whether or not 6 seconds) have been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the distribution combination object control means MN60 operates the distribution combination object C23 to the first position, and moves to the next process (process of step 1950).

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1914, at step 1918, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the second operation value (the distribution combination object is at the first position). It is a timer value that operates from the second position, and it is also a timing when the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game is reached, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 12 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the distribution combination object control means MN60 activates the distribution combination object C23 to the second position, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1950). In addition, at the timing of the process of step 1920, when the game ball is stored in the distribution winning combination C23, the game ball will enter the V winning opening C22 triggered by the process.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1918, at step 1922, the distribution combination object control means MN60 refers to the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the third operation value (the distribution combination object is at the second position). Is a timer value that operates from the first position to the first position, and in this example, 12.5 seconds) is determined. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the distribution combination object control means MN60 operates the distribution combination object C23 to the first position. Next, in step 1926, the distribution combination object control means MN60 turns off the distribution combination object operating flag in the flag area of the distribution combination object related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1928, the distribution combination object control means MN60 clears the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t to zero, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1950). Even if No in step 1912 or step 1922, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Here, the upper right part of the figure is an image diagram of the operation of the sorting component. The initial position of the distribution combination object C23 is the first position, and at the same time when the small hitting game is started, the distribution combination product C23 is actuated to the second position. Based on the distribution combination object operation timer value, "second position→first position→ Second position→initial position (first position)”. It should be noted that, substantially, the distribution combination object operation timer value becomes the first operation value and becomes the first position → the game ball enters the second special winning opening C20 → the game ball reaches the distribution combination object C23 -> game balls are stored in the distribution role C23 -> the distribution role operation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position -> the stored game balls enter the V winning opening C22, A big hit (special game) will be induced by performing a series of operations.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and sets a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, discharge). It is determined whether or not a flag that is turned on when a game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the waiting time is off. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the V winning opening winning determination means MJ11-V and determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the V winning opening C22. To do. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the V winning opening control means MN70 is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the discharge standby time end timing of the small hit game). Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the V winning opening control means MN70 transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main controller SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Although not shown, at the time of this processing execution, an error notification is executed at the time of a small hit game related to a small hit pattern (“2AK”, “4AK” in this example) that should not enter the V winning opening C22. Is configured. Next, in step 1960, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). To do.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the V winning opening control means MN70, the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game) It is determined whether or not is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and performs the next processing (processing of step 1997). ). Even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1997). In addition, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of unauthorized entry such as entry of a game ball into the V winning opening C22 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error handling is appropriately executed. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to entering the V winning opening C22 is "15R", and the series of the series of "small hit game → special game related to entering the V winning opening C22" is summed up. Then, the round number "1R" related to the small hit game and the round number "15R" related to the special game are "16R".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, the control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 22 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 7D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initialize the sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Reset the production related information at the time of power interruption in the sub-side RAM). After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (e) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 2050, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM displays a right hitting instruction display, which will be described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Perform control processing. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a holding information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a V winning detection effect display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and The repeat processing routine ends.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2050 to S2700) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), the sub-main control unit SM causes the command input port (from the main control board M side) in step 2004. Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command sent from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing is restored.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control processing of step 2700). , And is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Incidentally, the right-handed instruction display (first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display) is also displayed during the variable fixed time (long variable fixed time) in the time-reduced game state.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2056, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the small hit game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2057, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “2AK” (second large size). The winning opening C20 is a small hitting pattern that will be opened only once, and is not a case in which the game ball is designed not to enter the V winning opening C22 by the control operation of the distribution prize C23 described above. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2057, the process moves to step 2054. Here, to supplement the process, if the small hit symbol relating to the small hit currently being executed is “2AK”, the right hitting instruction display is not displayed, and thus the small hit for the player. While it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether or not it is being executed, if the small hit symbol relating to the small hit that is currently being executed is "4AK" or "7AK", the right-handing instruction display is displayed. For the player, it becomes easy to visually recognize whether or not the small hit is executed. Even when the small hit symbol relating to the small hit that is currently being executed is "4AK", the control operation of the distribution accessory C23 described above is designed so that the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C22. In this case, in this case, if the small hit symbol relating to the small hit that is currently being executed is "7AK" (by the control operation of the distribution accessory C23 described above, the game ball to the V winning opening C22 Since the same process (the process of displaying the right-handing instruction display) is executed as in the case where the player is designed to enter the ball, the player performs the right-handing while expecting a big hit to be triggered. (The game ball is shot toward the second special winning opening C20). Further, even when the small hit symbol relating to the small hit currently being executed is "2AK", the right hitting instruction display may be displayed. In such a case, the right hit related to "2AK" is displayed. It is desirable that the striking instruction display is configured to be less visible (not noticeable) to the player than the right striking instruction display relating to other small hitting symbols. Further, even if the same small hit symbol, depending on the game state at the time of winning the small hit symbol, the display mode of the right hitting instruction display may be different, for example, the right in the small hit game related to "2AK". When the small hitting game relating to "2AK" is won in the non-time shortening game state, the hitting instruction display does not execute the right hitting instruction display as before the small hitting game is started, and in the time shortening game state. When the small hit game related to "2AK" is won, the first right-handing instruction display may be executed as before the small hit game is started, and during the small hit game related to "4AK" and "7AK". When the right hitting instruction display is won in the non-time shortening game state, the small hitting game related to “4AK” or “7AK” is more than in the case where the right hitting instruction display is won in the time shortening gaming state. The display may be configured to be highly visible (conspicuous). Note that the visibility is a display area occupancy ratio such as transparency and how much of the entire display area SG10 is occupied. The visibility is not limited to the visibility, and the sound and the effect light emission mode may be different. (It may or may not have sound or effect emission).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2056 or step 2057, in step 2058, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. If Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). On the other hand, if No in step 2058, in step 2062, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for erasing the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (display command transmission control processing in step 2700). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of the right-handing instruction display. The first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display are displayed on the effect display device SG at positions where they do not overlap. In addition, since the situation in which the second right-handing instruction display is displayed is greater than the situation in which only the first right-handing instruction display is displayed, the player's profit loss is larger when the right-handing is not executed, The second right-handing instruction display is configured to be easier for the player to visually recognize (stand out) than the first right-handing instruction display. In this example, there are two types of right-handing instruction display (first right-handing instruction display, second right-handing instruction display), but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be provided. In the shortened gaming state, "transition to the time shortened gaming state → fluctuation related to small hit → start of small hit game → first opening of second big winning opening C20 → second opening of second big winning opening C20 → small hit In the sequence of "end of", the first right-handing instruction display (display mode similar to that of the present embodiment) is displayed in the entire sequence of the sequence, and (1) at the timing of transition to the time reduction game state. , A second right-hand striking instruction display (for example, a display mode of a red arrow pointing to the right, which is a display larger than the first right-hand striking instruction display) is displayed, and the variation start timing for the small hit (or during the variation for the small hit) At a certain timing, or at a fixed fixed time start timing for a small hit, etc.), the second right-handing instruction display is deleted, and the third right-handing instruction display (for example, larger than the first right-handing instruction display is displayed. The display mode of the arrow pointing to the right, which is a giraffe pattern, is displayed, and the third right-hand hitting instruction display is erased at the timing after the start of fluctuation related to the small hit and before the start of the small hit game, and the fourth A right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is displayed after the first opening of the second special winning opening C20, and At the timing prior to the second opening of the second special winning opening C20, the fourth right hitting instruction display is erased, and the fifth right hitting instruction display (for example, launching a game ball toward the second special winning opening C20). (2) Displaying a second right-handing instruction display (for example, a red arrow pointing to the right, which is a display larger than the first right-handing instruction display, at the timing of transition to the (2) time shortening game state) Aspect) is displayed, and the second right-hand hitting instruction is displayed at the variation start timing related to the small hit (or at a certain timing during the variation related to the small hit, the fixed fixed time start timing related to the small hit, etc.). Is displayed, and a third right-handing instruction display (for example, a display mode of a right-pointing giraffe pattern arrow, which is a display larger than the first right-handing instruction display) is displayed, and after the start of fluctuation related to the small hit, and At the timing before the small hitting game is started, the third right-handing instruction display is erased, and the fourth right-handing instruction display (for example, a display notifying the player that the high profit state is continuing) is displayed. , After the first opening of the second special winning opening C20 and before the second opening of the second special winning opening C20, a fourth right-handing instruction The display may be erased and a third right-handing instruction display (for example, a display mode of a right-pointing giraffe pattern arrow, which is a display larger than the first right-handing instruction display) may be displayed.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to a new suspension occurrence from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main pattern). It is determined whether or not (hold information related to the game symbol) is received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to store the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, "1" is added to the second main game (up to four). Next, in step 2106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 temporarily sends the command related to the new hold success/failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. It is stored and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2102, at step 2111, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the design drawing pending information display control means SM22 deletes the pending information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the hit result, the stop symbol information, the variation mode information) from the design symbol pending information temporary storage means SM22b. At the same time, the remaining reservation information is shifted. Next, in step 2116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Even if No in step 2111, the process moves to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the design drawing pending information display control means SM22 is in the design drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first pending display portion SG12 and the second pending display portion SG13). The same number of holding display lamps as the figure holding counter value are displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). In the present embodiment, in the situation where the game progresses by mainly repeating the variable display and the stop display of the first main game symbol (the situation where the game is a non-time-reduced game), special display is triggered by the stop display of the big hit symbol The game is mainly played, and in the situation where the game progresses by repeating mainly the variable display and the stop display of the second main game symbol (under the situation of time shortening game), the small hit symbol Since the game is mainly in the small hitting game executed by the stop display and the special game is executed when the player enters the V winning opening C22, the first main game side and the first game side 2 Basic game play is different from the main game side. Therefore, when the hold display lamp is lit, only the hold display of the first main game side is executed in the non-time shortening game situation, and the second main game side hold is executed in the time shortening game situation. It is preferable that the display is executed only. However, in the present embodiment, even if the second main game side is still held even under a situation where the game is a non-time reduction game, a special game triggered by the stop display of a further small hit symbol Therefore, under such circumstances, only the hold display of the second main game side is executed (or the hold display of the second main game side is more visible than the hold display of the first main game side). It is more preferable to configure it so that the big hit (a big hit related to the ball entering the V winning opening C22) triggered by a small hit won in the game state of shortening the time (or shortening the time) When the non-time reduction game state is entered after the jackpot is won in the game state), only the hold display on the second main game side is executed (or the hold display on the second main game side is the first main game side). It is even more preferable to configure such that the visibility is higher than that of the hold display. It should be noted that, regardless of the game state, both the first main game side hold display and the second main game side hold display may be displayed. In such a case, non-time reduction is achieved. Under the situation of a game, the hold display of the first main game side has higher visibility than the hold display of the second main game side, and in the situation of the time shortening game, the hold display of the second main game side is the first. It is desirable that the visibility be higher than the hold display on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not it is currently in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the variation is a symbol variation related to the first main game symbol. To do. If Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b. Design information (stop design/variation mode relating to the main game design) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation content, with reference to the stop design of the decorative design {for example, the stop design related to the main design is a big hit design If it is, it is a flat pattern such as "7,7,7", if it is a lost pattern, it is a random pattern such as "1.3.5"} and a variation mode {for example, variation related to the main game symbol If the mode is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if the mode is a long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined} and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means). The data is temporarily stored in the SM 24b and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process proceeds to step 2216.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2208, in step 2212, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b. With reference to the stored symbol information (stop symbol/variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation content, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined, and the variation mode is pseudo continuous variation ( (1) A change involving a temporary stop of the decorative design is performed a plurality of times during the change), and the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the reach effect related information temporary storage). It is temporarily stored in the means SM25b) and the process proceeds to step 2216.

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of fluctuations accompanied by quasi-continuous fluctuations. Here, the "main variation" is a series of processes from the start of the variable display of the decorative design for the first time to the final display of the decorative design (by the stop display mode) until the winning/deciding result is definitely notified. The content of change, "pseudo-variation", the variable display of the decorative design is started, and then the decorative design is temporarily displayed, but the result of success or failure is not definitely notified and a new variable display of the decorative design is displayed. It is the variation to be started, and the "final pseudo variation" means that the variation display of the decorative design is started, then the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the result of the winning/decision is definitively informed and the new variable display of the decorative design is started. It is a fluctuation that is not allowed. The “decorable design variable period” is a period during which the decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner (including the start of a new variable display), and is the same as the “main variation” period. Further, the "decorable period in which the decorative symbol cannot be changed" is a period in which the decorative symbol does not start a new variable display (because the result of winning or failing has been definitely notified by the stop display mode of the decorative symbol) to the player. It is configured to further execute an effect for definitely notifying that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, as shown in the figure, in the variable displayable period, the effect related to the same decorative pattern is executed from the start of the change in the case of a loss and the case of a big hit or a small hit (the temporary stop related to the pseudo change is The effect that is executed twice is executed). In addition, the purpose of performing such pseudo-continuous fluctuation is to display a further small hit symbol stop display if the second main game side is still held even under the situation of non-time shortening game. Because it is a structure that can be expected to execute special games triggered by the opportunity, because it is an effect aimed at fueling the expectation, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed for each pseudo variation is For example, when the small hit symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the remaining second main game side on hold (or the symbol fluctuation), the so-called chance is stopped and displayed (" It is preferable that the special arrangement such as "1, 2, 3" is configured to be stopped and displayed with a higher probability than when the small hitting symbols are not stopped and displayed). Further, even in the fluctuation related to the first main game side, the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be executed, and in such a case, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is relative to the fluctuation related to the second main game side. Is a small number of times, or the variation execution frequency with pseudo continuous variation is small {that is, the pseudo continuous variation on the first main game side occurs only in the non-time-reduced game state (or from the time-reduced game state) Is also likely to occur), or the frequency of occurrence of pseudo continuous fluctuations on the first main gaming side in the non-time shortened gaming state is the frequency of occurrence of pseudo continuous fluctuations on the second main gaming side in the non-time shortened gaming state It is desirable to configure so that Further, in the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo continuous fluctuation related to the second main game side, if the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to a big hit or a small hit, before 15 seconds which is the decorative symbol variable time (for example, a pseudo fluctuation The decorative pattern may be stopped at the first temporary stop timing).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2206, in step 2214, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) continue the effect mode during the previous special game. Display mode {displaying the decorative pattern is not displayed or is difficult to see even if displayed (not noticeable), and the number of acquired game balls displayed in the previous special game is also continuously displayed. According to the configuration, the player recognizes that the special game continues even if the special game is not being executed}, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). Transition. Even if No in step 2202, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2308, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the packaging variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. If Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the variation start timing of the decorative symbol on the basis of the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the diagram related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). , And proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Sent to).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 2700). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2322, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board M side main game). It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (confirmed display command) (transmits to the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Be done). Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2350). To do. Even if No in step 2310 or step 2330, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the V-winning prize detection effect display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the V prize detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a V prize detection command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 is an effect of notifying the player that the gaming ball has entered the V winning detection effect (V winning opening C22, this example. Then, "V" is displayed on the effect display device SG and a command relating to the effect of turning on the V lamp V10 is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2356, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the big hit symbol stop command is received from the main side. . If Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 causes the V winning detection effect (the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 after a predetermined time (1 second in this example). This is an effect for notifying the player of the effect, and in this example, a command relating to an effect of displaying "V" on the effect display device SG and turning on the V lamp V10 is set, and the next process (step 2400). Process). Thus, in the present embodiment, the V winning detection effect is executed even during the big hit related to the main game symbol, and the consistency of the effect with the big hit related to the V winning is secured. In addition, at the time of a big hit related to the main game symbol. Since the game ball has not actually entered the V winning opening C22, the V winning detection effect may not be executed. Even if No in step 2356, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. Big hit start display is performed on the SG (display is made appropriately based on the type of big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of acquired game balls on the effect display device SG on the basis of the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability or It may be executed as needed based on the type of jackpot). The number of acquired game balls displayed in this process is the total from the special game related to the first main game side in the normal game state to the completion of all the holds on the second main game side in the normal game state. Is the number of game balls (the total number of game balls acquired during the condominium).

Next, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2421, the background effect display control means SM23 executes the big hit end display (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2700). .. Even if No in step 2404 or step 2420, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 29 is a timing chart relating to the game progress from the first main game jackpot win in the present embodiment. In particular, in the non-time reduction game state, the first main game big hit symbol is stopped, after the special game is executed twice, in the non-time reduction game state, the action diagram in the case of winning the small hit related to the second main game Is. In this operation diagram, the variable fixed time is shown only for a long time (30 seconds in this example), and is not shown for a short time (0.2 seconds in this example). In this operation diagram, it is assumed that after timing 1 the left-handed ball is switched to the right-handed ball, and after that, the right-handed ball is always shot continuously (one shot at approximately 0.6 second intervals). .

First, under the situation of non-time shortening game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol “7A”, which is a special game of 4R (first big prize) A special game for opening the mouth C10) is executed.

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the execution of the special game ends, and the special game related to the first main game side ends, so that the game state becomes the time-reduced game state. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the fixed fixed time for a long time (30 seconds in this example) starts when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hit symbol "BK". To be done. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the maximum number (4) of the second main game suspensions can be almost certainly generated by the long fixed time period.

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the small hitting game relating to the small hitting symbol “BK” that has been stopped is started when the fluctuation fixed time ends. Next, at the timing 5 in the figure, during the small hitting game in execution, the game balls are stored in the distribution winning combination C23 in the second special winning opening C20, and discharge related to the small hitting game in execution. During the waiting time, the distribution winning combination C23 moves to the second position to enter the V winning opening C22. It should be noted that the above-described V winning detection effect is executed by the ball entering the V winning opening C22. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the small hit game is finished, and the 15R special game is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game.

Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the special game of 15R is finished, the special game is the special game related to the second main game, and the small hit game is elected to the special game. Due to the fact that the time gaming state is the time shortening gaming state, the gaming state becomes the non-time shortening gaming state. In addition, the variation of the second main game symbol is started.

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the small hitting game related to the "BK" is started when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hitting symbol "BK". Since the gaming state is the non-time shortened gaming state, the variable fixed time for "BK" is short (0.2 seconds in this example). Next, at the timings 9 and 10 in the figure, similarly to the timings 5 and 6 in the figure described above, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C22, the end of the small hit game, and the start of the special game are executed. It

Next, at the timing 11 in the figure, the special game of 15R ends, the special game is a special game related to the second main game, and the small hit game is won. Due to the fact that the time gaming state is the non-time shortened gaming state, the gaming state becomes the time shortened gaming state. In addition, the variation of the second main game symbol is started.

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability related to the second main game is set to a high probability (about 1/6 in this example), and the small hitting game is being executed. In, in the V winning opening C22 is configured so that the game ball can be almost certainly entered, and based on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit related to the second main game, after the special game related to the small hit is finished. By configuring to determine the game state, first, when the big hit related to the first main game is won, in the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, "Small hit related to the second main game → V winning The special game relating to the mouth C22 will be won, and the second main game hold that has been generated up to the maximum number (4 in this example) in the time shortening game state relates to the V winning mouth C22. By being digested in the non-time-reduced game state after the end of the special game, it is possible to automatically expect a new win for "a small hit related to the second main game → a special game related to the V winning opening C22". . That is, each time a small hit is won before the holding of the second main game remaining in the non-time shortened game state is exhausted, two big hits of game balls are given to the player. It is possible to realize a novel game play.

The gaming machine in this example may be configured such that the sub-main control section SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps the current time by a built-in power source. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a mechanism that is provided on the base of the sub-main control unit SM and that measures time. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the board, and keeps timing even when power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, so the date and time set at the time of factory shipment etc. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on the.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a special game that is won in the time-reduced game state (or non-time-reduced game state), a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more of the small hits is won in the second main game hold. If there is a hold scheduled to be performed, it is substantially determined that the special game will be executed a plurality of times after the special game is finished during the execution of the special game (with a small hit in the non-time reduction game state). The effect may be configured to notify the player to the effect that the effect is notified, and the effect notifies the player of the date and time when the effect is started by using, for example, the real-time clock RTC. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the feeling that the production that has a low appearance frequency and that the acquisition of a large number of balls has been substantially determined is allocated at the current timing. The effect may be executed when there is a predetermined number (for example, three) of winnings to be won in the second main game hold, but in the second main game hold. It is desirable to configure so that it is not executed when there is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more of jackpots to be won. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of special games can be continuously executed when the small hit is won, so during the special game execution, a big hit is held in the second main game hold. When there is a hold, the effect for informing the existence of the hold may not be executed.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game side and the second main game side realize a new game nature by making the transition tendency (particularly, presence or absence of transition) of the game state after the end of the special game different. However, this new game variation is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration for showing another game variation, which is different from the present embodiment, will be referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Although the first modification from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, it can be applied to other embodiments (not only this embodiment but also the second and subsequent embodiments). I will also add that.

First, FIG. 30 is a game progress flowchart in the first modification from the present embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the modified example 1 from the present embodiment is that a plurality of types are provided as the number of time saving times that can be selected on the first main game side and the second main game side (especially, on the second main game side, It is preferable to provide a large number of time saving times). The flow of the game shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Game progression flow 1>
In the case of the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to open the state, a so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is shot at the mouth A10 (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. Then, when the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability=1/256), which is carried out when the first main game starting opening A10 is entered, is shown in the figure. The first main game jackpot wins", and after the fluctuation of the symbols of the first main game symbols based on the win ends (after the jackpot symbols of the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 10 rounds is executed (in this example, the first big winning opening C10 is opened, and “15 prize balls”ד9 counts”=“135 balls” are obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, "rush challenge zone" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is a game state in which it is easy to open, Since the state shifts to the so-called electric power support state = time saving state), the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (by making a so-called right strike) to advance the game. , It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting port B10 (with the entry into the second main game starting port B10 as a trigger, the winning/discarding lottery on the second main game side and the symbol of the second main game symbol) Fluctuations are made). Here, the "rush challenge zone" is counted from the end of the special game executed in <Game progression flow 1>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is performed. However, at least it continues until the predetermined number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is the first predetermined number of times (after the end of the special game executed in <Game Progress Flow 1>). Either 7 times in this example) or a second predetermined number (100 times in this example) is set (in this example, the ratio of the first predetermined number being set: the second predetermined number is The ratio to be set=99:1, and typically, the number of times set according to the kind of the big hit symbol of the first main game symbol stopped and displayed in the <gaming progression flow 1> is set. By doing so, such a ratio difference (occupancy ratio) is generated}.

<Game progress flow 3>
When the small hit lottery on the second main game side (in this example, small hit probability=1/15) is won when the second main game start opening B10 is entered, it is shown in the figure. "Second main game small hit win" becomes, and after the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol based on the win ends (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), one round worth A small hit game is executed (in this example, the second big winning opening C20 is opened, but in the case of the configuration of the present embodiment, the game ball is aimed at the second big winning opening C20. If it is continuously fired, it is almost definite to enter the V winning opening C22). Then, after the end of the small hitting game, a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22) (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds are distributed, but typically Is configured so that such a distribution difference is caused by setting the maximum number of rounds determined according to the type of the small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and the maximum number of rounds is the small winning symbol game. The total number of rounds is the total of the number of rounds in which the second special winning opening C20 related to is opened and the number of rounds opened in the first special winning opening C10 related to the special game executed by the small hit. The big hit (from the small hit game to the special game triggered by the small hit game is referred to as the big hit) is executed (in this example, in the special game triggered by the small hit, the first big winning opening C10). "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" can be obtained per round, and when the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4, the game balls obtained in the small hit game are included. Approximately 500 balls remain as the player's ball, and when the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15, approximately 1900 balls remain as the player's ball, including the game balls obtained in the small hit game). In addition, when the special game is started triggered by the small hit and the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 10R, it is considered as one round of the small hit game which triggered the special round (the second big winning opening C20 is opened). With the 9 rounds of the special game started (the first special winning opening C10 is open), the predetermined maximum round is 10 rounds.

<Game progression flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 3> ends, a "rush zone" shown in the figure (a game state in which the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is likely to be opened, a so-called Since the state shifts to the electric support state=time saving state), the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting opening B10 (with the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 as a trigger, the winning/discarding lottery and the symbol fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol on the second main gaming side. Is done). Here, the "rush zone" is calculated after the end of the special game executed in <Game progression flow 3>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is performed. , It continues at least until the specified number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the specified number of times is the first specified number of times (after the end of the special game executed in <Game Progress Flow 3>). In the example, 10 times), the second specific number (20 times in this example), the third specific number (30 times in this example), the fourth specific number (50 times in this example), and the Any of 5 specific times (100 times in this example) is set {In this example, the ratio of the first number of times is set: The ratio of the second number of times is set: The third number of times is set Proportion of being set: Proportion of being set the fourth number of times: Proportion of being set of the fifth number of times=43:20:17:13:7, and is typically <game progress flow 3> It is configured such that such a ratio difference (occupancy rate) is generated by setting the number of times determined according to the kind of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol stopped and displayed. Then, under the situation where the "rush zone" continues, <game progress flow 3> occurs (as shown in the figure, with a probability of 78% on average, a small amount occurs during the stay in the "rush zone". If the player wins the prize), <Game progression flow 4> is reached, and the game moves to the “rush zone” again, so that the player can obtain a large number of balls due to this loop property.

<Game progress flow 5>
When the above-described predetermined number of times (7 or 100 times in this example), which is the number of times the "rush challenge zone" can be continued, is reached, the internal game state is the normal game state (second main game start port electric Although the accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to open and is in a so-called non-electric power support state), the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side that occurs when the second main game starting opening B10 is entered. Since the (second main game hold upper limit number) is "4", the second main game side holds (is able to occur up to the second main game hold upper limit number) when the normal game state is entered. Even when <game progress flow 3> occurs during digestion, it becomes <game progress flow 4>, and it becomes almost definite to move to the “rush zone” (the second main in the case of considering this event as well) The winning percentage on the game side is shown in the figure). Similarly, when the specific number of times (in this example, 10, 20, 30, 50 or 100 times) that is the number of times the “rush zone” can be continued is reached, As a gaming state, it is in a normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the second main game starting port electric auditors item B11d is unlikely to be in an open state, a so-called non-electric support state), but to the second main game starting port B10. Since the upper limit number of reserves on the side of the second main game (second upper limit number of game reserves) that occurs upon entry of a ball is "4", it remains when the normal game state is entered (second main) Even if <game progress flow 3> occurs when the second main game side holds the reserve time, it becomes <game progress flow 4>, and it is almost unnecessary to move to the “rush zone” again. It becomes definite (the small winning percentage on the second main game side when this event is also taken into account is described in the figure).

<Game progress flow 6>
When the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (7 or 100 times in this example), which is the number of times that the "rush challenge zone" can be continued, is reached, and the second main game side that remains when the normal game state is reached When <game progress flow 3> does not occur at the time of digesting all the reservations of, the process shifts to the “normal game” shown in the figure. Similarly, when the above-described specific number of times (in this example, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100 times) that is the number of times the “rush zone” can be continued is reached, and normally When <game progress flow 3> does not occur at the time of digesting all of the second main game side's holdings remaining at the time of entering the game state, shift to the “normal game” shown in the figure. To do.

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <Game Progress Flow 1>, a small hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, small hit probability=1/65536) is also triggered by the entry into the first main game starting opening A10. Therefore, when the small hit lottery is won, the "first main game small hit win" shown in the figure is executed and one round of the small hit game is executed (for example, in the small hit game in this case, (2 open the big winning opening C20), and after the end of the small hitting game, a special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22) is executed. It is also possible to configure. Further, when the special game is finished, it is possible to shift to the "rush challenge zone" shown in the figure. Here, the handling when winning the small hitting lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but when it is configured to win with a very low probability as in this example, in the small hitting game At the time of execution, if the game balls are continuously shot aiming at the second special winning opening C20, it is preferable that it is configured so that entering the V winning opening C22 is substantially definite. In addition, after the end of the small hitting game, the maximum number of rounds that can be set (for example, 15 rounds) of special games are executed, and the above-mentioned predetermined number of times that the "rush challenge zone" can be continued. It is preferable to set the maximum number that can be set (for example, 100 times). Also, in the time-saving game state (“rush challenge zone” or “rush zone”), winning the big hit on the occasion of the small win on the second main game side is the main flow to increase the number of balls. In the time shortening game state, when the big hit on the second main game side is won without a small hit, the maximum number of times saved (100 times in this example) is set after the end of the special game. For example, it is desirable to give priority (increased) to the number of shorter working hours than after finishing the big hit through the small hit.

In addition, the configuration of the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, (1) when the big hit (or small hit) in the "normal time" is won, the average value of the number of times saved and shortened after the big hit is "Rush Challenge Zone", "Rush Zone") less than the average value of the number of time saving after the big hit when you win the big hit (or small hit), (2) For some big hit symbols, The number of hours saved after the end of the big hit is shorter than in the case of winning the big hit (or the big hit triggered by the small hit) in "normal time", the time-saving gaming state ("rush challenge zone", "rush zone") There are more cases where the big hit (or the big hit triggered by the small hit) is won in (3) When the big hit (or small hit) on the second main game side is won in the "normal time" (for example, , When the time saving game state ends and becomes "normal time", when the big hit occurs due to the remaining hold of the second main game side), the average value of the number of hours saved after the big hit ends Is configured to be larger than the average value of the number of hours saved after the big hit when the big hit (or the small hit) on the first main game side is won in the "normal time".

In the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, when the right to transfer the special game is acquired (when the big hit symbol is stopped, when the small hit game entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game is over, etc.), the specific entry is made. The big hit may be configured to start by entering the game ball into the ball entrance, and the number of time saving after the big hit is determined by entering the game ball into the specific entrance. It may be configured to be determined by a lottery when a game ball enters the entrance. With such a configuration, by visually recognizing the small hit pattern when the small hit is won, the player can determine the number of times that the small hit can be saved and saved after the big hit ends, and the V winning opening C22 can be played. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines which is more advantageous in the case where the game is entered and the case where the game is not played.

With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first main game side or the second main game side. , In addition, regardless of whether it is due to winning the big hit lottery or due to the occurrence of a small hit game, after the special game is over, it is configured to always shift to the so-called electric support state However, it is configured to be variable with respect to the period in which the electric support state is maintained, and at least when the small hit game occurs during the period in which the electric support state is maintained, Since the special game is also configured to be deterministic, the playability is whether or not the small hit game can be generated during the period in which the electric support state is maintained. , Since the small hit probability is always constant, it is possible to create a new gaming variation in which a more advantageous situation is constructed for the player as the period in which the electric support state is maintained becomes longer. It will be possible.

Incidentally, because of such playability, it is desirable not to notify the player of the period in which the electric power support state can be maintained (in other words, the number of hours saved after the end of the special game), With such a configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation as to how long the electric power support state is maintained (up to the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game), which makes the game entertaining. Will increase. Further, as the effect related to the number of time saving, the effect may be executed to show the player that the number of time saving has increased. For example, when the number of time saving set after the end of the special game is 50 times. At the end of the special game, "10 times" is displayed as the remaining number of shortening times, and the 10th symbol fluctuation (0 minute remaining symbol fluctuation) (or at the timing before the 10th fluctuation), " By displaying “+40 times”, it is possible to exemplify an effect in which the number of times saved is increased. Moreover, the said structure is applicable to both a "rush challenge zone" and a "rush zone", for example, when the number of hours is 100 times in a "rush challenge zone", the said "rush challenge zone" At the start of the "zone", "7 times" is displayed as the remaining number of shortening times, and at the 7th symbol fluctuation (0 minute remaining symbol fluctuation) (or at the timing before the 7th fluctuation), "+93" It may be configured to display "time" (or display the remaining number of shortened times after displaying "still more"). If the number of hours saved is 100 in the "rush challenge zone", the remaining number of hours saved may be displayed as "100" from the start of the "rush challenge zone". From the start of the “rush challenge zone”, “rush zone” may be displayed, and the same effect mode as during the stay in the “rush zone” may be adopted.

In addition, the production mode may be different between during the stay in the "rush challenge zone" and during the stay in the "rush zone" (a production mode in which the "rush zone" is recognized to be more profitable is desirable. ), in the "rush challenge zone", when the number of times saved is 100, the number of times saved is the same as the maximum number of times saved in the "rush zone", which is a high profit for the player, The same effect as that during the stay in the "rush zone" may be executed. In addition, it may be configured to execute both the configuration for performing the same production as during the stay in the "rush zone" and the configuration for performing the production that makes it appear that the number of times saved is increased. The production mode executed in the "rush challenge zone" is "production mode A" and the production mode executed in the "rush zone" is "production mode B". In the "rush challenge zone", the number of hours saved is 100 times. In this case, at the start of the "rush challenge zone", "7 times" is displayed as the number of remaining time reductions, and the effect mode to be executed is set as "effect mode A", and the 7th symbol variation (remaining 0 times) (Or at the timing before the 7th change), "+93 times" is displayed (or "Remaining-" is displayed and then the remaining number of times saved is displayed), and thereafter the effect is executed. You may comprise so that a mode may be set as "production mode B."

In addition, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the small winning probability of the second main game side (in this example, the normal gaming state, the time-reduced gaming state, both 1/15), the big winning probability in the normal gaming state (In this example, the winning rate is 10 times or more than 1/256). That is, there is a so-called probability variation function (a function that increases the jackpot winning probability itself) as a method for increasing the frequency of occurrence of special games in conventional Pachinko gaming machines, but with this probability variation function, the jackpot winning probability is It is customary to set the upper limit to be less than 10 times the original jackpot winning probability, and if a configuration like the first modification from the present embodiment is adopted, the special upper limit will be exceeded at a frequency higher than the upper limit. It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of games.

Incidentally, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, in the time shortening game state, when the big hit on the first main game side is won, the number of time saving after the big hit is the same as the second main game side. May be the number of times (the number of times is divided) (it may be configured to shift to the “rush zone”). In addition, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (or the jackpot triggered by the jackpot), the number of time saving after the jackpot on the second main game side (including after the jackpot with the jackpot as a trigger) is The same number of times (sorting of times) may be used.

(Modification 2 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, as described in <Game progression flow 4>, it is a “rush zone” (a game state in which the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is easily opened, The so-called electric power support state = time saving state) is calculated after the end of the special game executed in <Game progression flow 3>, and the number of times the symbol variation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is performed. However, it is configured to continue at least until the specific number of times is reached, but the number of times set as the specific number of times is typically the second number stopped and displayed in <Game Progress Flow 3>. In some cases, the number of times determined according to the type of the small winning symbol of the main game symbol is set. In this case, the player confirms the kind of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the set schedule is set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main game symbol. If the specific number of times is determined in advance and the specific number of times (that is, the number of time-saving continuations to be set) is relatively small, enter the game ball into the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game. By not performing the game (this is a so-called stop-and-shoot strategy, the player can get a chance to newly stop and display the one with a relatively large number of time saving durations), and thus the designed winning rate There is concern that the above-mentioned payout rate will be derived. Of course, there are several ways to avoid such a situation. For example, if the number of time saving continuations is relatively small, increase the number of coins (for example, maximum rounds) obtained by special games. Alternatively, just after the start of the small hitting game, only the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening C20 are guided to the V winning opening C22. However, as a reverse idea, it is also possible to incorporate the above-mentioned stop-and-shoot strategy as one game characteristic, and therefore, a configuration for exemplifying such game characteristic is modified example 2 from the present embodiment. In the following, only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail. Although the second modification from the present embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, it can be applied to other embodiments (not only the present embodiment but also the second and subsequent embodiments). I will also add that.

First, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control section SM side) in the second modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2550 (variant 2), the purpose is a game state in which the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d is likely to be in an open state, that is, a so-called electric support state = a time saving state. It is configured to notify the player of the remaining period that can be continued. That is, in step 2550 (variation 2), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the remaining time saving display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2050.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the remaining time reduction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (variation 2) of FIG. 31 in the second modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2552, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the current time reduction game state (so-called electric support state). If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for notifying the number of remaining time reductions (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2050). On the other hand, if No in step 2552, in step 2556 the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for erasing the notification of the remaining number of shortened times (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2050). In the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, in the time shortening game state (so-called electric support state), it is configured to notify the remaining number of shortened times, as will be described later, a small hit of the second main game symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of shortening times to be set after the special game triggered by the small hit of the second main game symbol is notified, but based on the remaining number of shortening times notified by this process. The player is configured to be able to determine whether or not to enter the second special winning opening C20 (however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining number of shortened times may be unannounced).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 of FIG. 31 in the second modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2600 (variant 2), and the purpose thereof is to execute the notification control process for incorporating the above-mentioned stop-and-attack strategy as one game property. That is, when it is in the time shortening game state (so-called electric power support state) in step 2052, in step 2600 (variant 2), the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 executes a time-saving, medium-time right-handing instruction display control process, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a time saving medium right hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (variation 2) of FIG. 33 in the second modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2602, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is currently a small hit (because the so-called electric power support state is in effect, the small hit of the second main game symbol is the main). It is determined whether or not the change is related to. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol related to the fluctuation is a short time short number of times small hit symbol (the small hit symbol concerned). Is a small hitting number that is relatively small after the end of the special game triggered by the, the example 1 of the modification from the present embodiment, for example, short and short times Is 10 to 30 times, and the number of times saved and shortened is 50 times or 100 times). If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the remaining shortened time count (the same as the one notified in step 2554) is the notification mode switching value. (It is the same value as the denominator of the small hit probability on the second main game side, which is 15 in this example), and it is determined whether or not the value is larger. The notification mode switching value may be set to the same value as the second main game holding upper limit number (four in this example) without any problem even if changed. If Yes in step 2606, in step 2608, the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 does not prompt the player to enter the special winning opening winning selection selecting effect execution command (the second winning opening C20, or the V winning opening C22). (Command related to information to execute effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). On the other hand, if No in step 2602, step 2604, or step 2606, in step 2610, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 displays a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (second big winning prize). A command relating to the information for executing the effect of prompting the player to enter the mouth C20, and eventually the V winning opening C22, is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). ), and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Here, the lower part of the figure is a display image diagram of the special winning opening winning selection effect. As shown in this image diagram, when the special winning opening winning a prize selection effect is executed, first, a display that prompts the player to stop the emission of the game ball is executed, "Please stop the emission". Next, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), after the message "Please stop firing" is displayed, V is selected in the winning jackpot game, "If you hit the right, you get 10 hours/hours." When a game ball is inserted into the winning opening C22, a display is executed to inform the player of the number of times of shortening that is scheduled to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit. Therefore, the player selects whether or not to enter the second special winning opening C20, based on the number of time savings to be set after the end of the special game triggered by the small hit and the notified number of remaining time savings. By doing so, it is possible to select whether to settle at the number of times saved due to the set or to obtain a chance to newly stop and display those with a relatively large number of times saved, creating a new gaming property. can do.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, it is configured such that the special winning opening winning a prize selection effect can be executed during the change of the small winning symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed at the small hit start demo time related to the symbol, and in such a case, the small hit start demo time of the small hit symbol for which the special winning opening prize selection effect can be executed is large. It is desirable that the winning opening is longer than the small hit start demonstration time of the small hit design in which the winning selection effect is not executed. Further, the notification mode switching value may not be provided, and only when the small hitting start demo time is relatively long, the special winning opening winning selection effect may be executed at the small hitting start demo time. . With such a configuration, the player can select whether or not to enter the game ball into the second special winning opening C20 (and thus the V winning opening C22) during the long-time small hit start demonstration. (If you do not want to enter the ball, stop firing the game ball). Also, so-called hold prefetch processing is executed, and when there is a hold that is a small hit in the hold, it is possible to execute the special winning opening prize selection effect in advance before the change related to the small hit. It may be done (that is, before the hold that will win the small hit is exhausted, the fact that a small hit will occur in the future and the number of time saved to be set in the future will be notified. ).

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a special game triggered by a small hit and the number of time saved to be given after the end of the special game are set in the special game. If the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a special game triggered by a small hit is relatively large for each small hit pattern that is a trigger of the game, the number of time saving after the special game is relatively reduced, When the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special game triggered by the small hit is relatively small, the number of time saving after the special game may be adjusted to be relatively large. With such a configuration, if the small hit pattern that the special game with a small number of times saved is won, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second big winning opening C20 (the game ball It is no longer advantageous for the player to just interrupt the launch), and the ball output rate greatly differs depending on the mode of launch of the game ball during the small hit game (whether to continue firing or interrupt the firing). It is possible to configure the game so that there is no such thing (there is no firing mode in which the payout rate remarkably increases), so that the player loses a loss even if he/she progresses in the firing mode of the game ball according to his taste. This will not happen and the fairness of the game will be maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, when the remaining time saving time is equal to or less than the notification mode switching value, the special winning opening winning selection effect is not executed even if the small hit is won. Although configured in this way, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to always be able to execute a special winning opening prize selection effect when in a time shortening game state (so-called electric support state). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the symbol variation for the number of times shortened is finished, and the symbol variation relating to the hold on the second main game side that remains when the time shortening game state shifts to the normal game state ( That is, when the player wins the small hit, when the player holds the small chance of being the last chance to generate a small hit), the special winning opening winning selection effect is not executed (that is, the player enters the V winning opening C22. May be prioritized).

(Second embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit or the small hit, after the special game (including both the special game related to the main game symbol and the special game related to the V winning opening C22) is finished. Although the game state is determined, the method of determining the game state is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration that is a method of determining a game state after the end of a special game, which is different from the present embodiment, is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modified example based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment.

First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 7 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the maximum number of the second main game suspension is changed to one.

Next, FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the small hit winning probability of the first main game side and the second main game side is changed, and the big hit symbol is given to both the first main game side and the second main game side. Two types are provided and two types of small hit symbols on the second main game side. In the second embodiment, in the winning/winning lottery on the second main game side, it is configured so that a small hit is almost won. With such a configuration, even if the maximum number of the second main game hold described above in FIG. 31 is set to one, it is possible to win the small hit in the variation related to the one hold. In addition, depending on the big hit symbol that is the opportunity to win the big hit, the game state after the big hit is different (whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state).

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1760 (second) to step 1764 (second), and the purpose is to end the special game depending on the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol related to the executed special game. It is to be configured to determine a later game state. That is, in step 1760 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the special game relating to the big hit symbol is finished (first main game side and second main game side. Both are included). In the case of Yes in step 1760 (second), in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is the time saving big hit symbol (the time is shortened after the special game ends). It is a big hit symbol that will be transferred to the game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 7A/7B). If Yes in step 1762 (second), the process proceeds to step 1755 (becomes a time-reduced game state), while if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800) (not be a time-reduced game state). ) Do.

On the other hand, if No in step 1760 (second), in step 1764 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and becomes the trigger for the special game that has ended. The small hit pattern related to the small hit game that has been executed at the timing of winning is a time saving shift small hit pattern (it shifts to the time shortening game state after the special game related to the V prize in the small hit game related to the small hit pattern ends. It is a different small hit pattern, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 7AK, 7BK). In the case of Yes in step 1764, the process shifts to step 1755 (becomes the time reduction game state), while in the case of No, the process shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800) (there is no time reduction game state).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2218 (second), and the purpose is to shift to a time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state) after the completion of execution of a certain special game, the time-reduced game state. While the (so-called electric support state) continues, it is to execute an effect that is story-related to the effect contents displayed when the certain special game is executed. That is, in the case of No in step 2206 or step 2208, in step 2218 (second), the drawing display content determination means SM21n continuously displays the effect contents of the variation in the effect mode during the previous special game, The battle standby effect mode (the effect image of this effect will be described later) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2216. In the second embodiment, the decorative design is not displayed in step 2218 (second), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design may be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display of the decorative design is smaller (or less noticeable) than the display of the decorative design to be displayed in step 2210.

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 22 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2650 (second), the purpose of which is to continuously generate special games in a situation where special games occur continuously in a short period of time. It is to execute the production related to each other in a story. That is, in step 2412, after setting a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds, the number of winning prizes, and the number of game balls acquired, in step 2650 (second), the background effect display control means SM23 is executing a special game, which will be described later. The effect control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of special game in-execution effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) of FIG. 39 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game related to the first main game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stop symbol is the first main game time shortening shift jackpot symbol {time shortening game state (so-called electricity. It is a big hit symbol that triggers the transition to the support state), and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7A}. It should be noted that the first main game time shift short hit small hit symbol "7AK" as an opportunity to shift to the time shortening game state (so-called electric support state) even after the special game ends, so shift to step 2656 (first main game short hit The design is "7AK" only). In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect for notifying that the battle rush challenge success effect (the time shortening game state will be entered) as the effect during the special game. , The effect image of this effect will be described later). Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the initial value to the battle continuation counter SM23c (the counter referred to when determining the effect during the special game via the small hit on the second main game side) ( In this example, 2) is set and the process moves to step 2662. On the other hand, if No in step 2654, in other words, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that does not trigger the transition to the first main game time-short non-transition symbol {time reduction game state (so-called electric support state), and in this example, 2A } {If you win "2A" with a small hit as a trigger, you will move to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) and the result will be Yes in step 2654}, and background effect in step 2658 The display control means SM23 executes, as an effect during the special game, a battle rush challenge failure effect (an effect for notifying that the time reduction game state will not be entered, an effect image of this effect will be described later). Then, the process proceeds to step 2662. Even if No in step 2652, the process proceeds to step 2662.

Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the special game related to the second main game (particularly, the special game via the small hit on the second main game side). It is determined whether or not (game) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664 the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the battle continuation counter SM23c. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the battle continuation counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small hit pattern that triggered the transition of the special game is the second main game time short transition small. It is determined whether or not a hit symbol {a small hit symbol which is a trigger for shifting the special game and a trigger for shifting to a time shortening game state (so-called electric support state) and in this example, 7BK}. In addition, after the special game related to the second main game time reduction big hit symbol "7B", to shift to the time shortening game state (so-called electric support state), move to step 2670, and the second main game time short non-shift big hit symbol After the special game related to "2B" is finished, the time reduction game state (so-called electric support state) is not moved, so that the process proceeds to step 2674. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect for notifying that the first battle victory effect (the time shortening game state will be entered) as the effect during the special game. , The effect image of this effect will be described later). Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) to the battle continuation counter SM23c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2420).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2668, in other words, if the stop symbol is not the second main gaming time-shifting short hit symbol (in this example, if the small hit symbol is 2BK), in step 2674, background effect display control The means SM23 executes, as an effect during the special game, a first battle non-winning effect (an effect for notifying that the time reduction game state will not be entered, and an effect image of this effect will be described later). , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2420). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2666, in step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the small hit pattern that triggered the transition of the special game is the second main game short time. Transition small hit symbol {is a small hit symbol which is a trigger for shifting the special game and is a trigger for shifting to a time shortening game state (so-called electric support state), and in this example, 7BK}. In addition, after the special game related to the second main game time-shortening big hit symbol "7B", to shift to a time-shortening game state (so-called electric support state), shift to step 2678, and the second main game time-short non-shifting big hit symbol After the special game related to "2B" is finished, the game does not shift to the time-reduced gaming state (so-called electric support state), so that the routine proceeds to step 2682. In the case of Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 is an effect of notifying that the second battle victory effect (the time shortening game state will be entered) as the effect during the special game. , The effect image of this effect will be described later). Next, in step 2680, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (2 in this example) in the battle continuation counter SM23c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2420). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2676, in other words, if the stop symbol is not the second main game time shortening transition small hit symbol (in this example, if the small hit symbol is 2BK), in step 2682, background effect display control The means SM23 executes, as an effect during the special game, a second battle non-winning effect (an effect for notifying that the time reduction game state will not be entered, and an effect image of this effect will be described later). , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2420). Even if No in step 2662, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2420).

Next, FIG. 41 is a game progress flowchart in the second embodiment. The flow of the game shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Game progression flow 1>
In the case of the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to open the state, a so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is shot at the mouth A10 (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. Then, when the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability=1/234), which is carried out when the first main game starting opening A10 is entered, is shown in the figure. The first main game jackpot wins", and after the fluctuation of the symbols of the first main game symbols based on the win ends (after the jackpot symbols of the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 8 rounds is executed (in this example, the first special winning opening C10 is opened, and “15 prize balls”ד9 counts”=“135 balls” are obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, with a selection rate of 33% (for example, the first main game jackpot symbol “7A which will be shifted to the time reduction game state after the end of the special game”). ], and the first main game jackpot symbol "2A" that will not shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game, "7A": "2A" = 1:2 selected) The player shifts to the "battle mode" (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which the state is likely to be opened, so-called electric support state = time saving state), so the player starts the second main game. It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting opening B10 by firing the game ball aiming at the mouth electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game (second main game). With the entry into the starting opening B10 as a trigger, the winning/losing lottery and the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol are performed on the second main game side). Incidentally, when the special game relating to the first main game jackpot symbol is not completed and the time-reducing game state is not entered, the "normal game" shown in the figure is entered.

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player enters the "battle mode", the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game, and the second main game. A small hit due to the fluctuation of the symbol of the second main game symbol relating to the entry into the starting opening B10 (in the win/loss lottery related to the second main game, since it is won at 1/1.01, it is a small win) Along with winning, the second main game hold 1 occurs during the symbol change (the second main game hold upper limit is 1) (when the game balls are continuously fired, the second during the symbol change) 2 Main game hold may occur). Also, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is finished (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hit game for one round is executed ( In the present example, the second special winning opening C20 is opened, but in the case of the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game balls are continuously shot aiming at the second special winning opening C20, V It is almost definite to enter the winning opening C22). Then, after the end of the small hitting game, a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22) (in this example, 4 rounds or 15 rounds are distributed, but typically Is configured so that such a distribution difference is caused by setting the maximum number of rounds determined according to the type of the small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and the maximum number of rounds is the small winning symbol game. The total number of rounds is the total of the number of rounds in which the second special winning opening C20 related to is opened and the number of rounds opened in the first special winning opening C10 related to the special game executed by the small hit. A big hit (from a small hit game to a special game triggered by the small hit game is called a big hit) is executed (in this example, in the special game triggered by the small hit, the first big winning opening C10 is It is opened and you can get "15 prize balls" x "9 counts" = "135 balls" per round, and if the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 4, you can get the game balls that you can get in the small hit game. About 500 balls remain as the player's ball, and when the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 15, about 1900 balls remain as the player's ball, including the game balls obtained in the small hit game).

<Game progression flow 4>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 3> ends, with a selection rate of 33% (for example, the second main game small hit symbol “which will be shifted to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game” 7BK", and the second main game small hit symbol "2BK" that will not shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game exists, and is selected by 7BK:2BK=1:2), again < It becomes the same action as the game progress flow 3> (while the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is executed based on the remaining second main game suspension, one second main game suspension newly occurs) . On the other hand, in the case where the special game has not been moved to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is executed based on the remaining second main game hold (because it is a so-called non-electric support state. , A new second main game hold does not occur), and a small hit due to the symbol fluctuation (in the winning/nothing lottery related to the second main game, it is almost a small win because 1/1.01 is won) When winning, as described above, "Small hit -> Ball entry into V winning hole C22 -> Special game" is executed. Then, after the end of the special game, the game state is similarly determined based on the small hit symbol, and when the game state is the time-reduced game state, the same as the <game progress flow 3> again. It becomes an action (while the symbol variation of the second main game symbol relating to the ball entering the second main game starting port B10 is executed, a second second main game hold newly occurs). On the other hand, when the game state is not the time-reduced game state, the second main game hold does not exist, so that the "normal game" shown in the figure is entered. As described above, in the "battle mode", it is almost guaranteed that the "small hit → V entry into the V winning opening C22 → special game" is executed twice at the time of entry, and after the special game is completed twice. In any of the above, when the time shortening game state is entered, the "small hit→V entry into the C winning hole C22→special game" is executed twice, a non-time shortening game state and the second main game hold Until there is no game, the advantageous state for the player is a game property that loops. It should be noted that the number of times that the execution of "small hit → V entry into V winning opening C22 → special game" is almost guaranteed is one symbol variation related to entry into the second main game starting opening B10, and the symbol variation concerned. It was configured to be twice with one of the second main game hold that occurred in the inside, but it is not limited to this, and the second main game hold upper limit number is set to 3, and the "small hit → V prize" The number of times that the execution of "ball entry into mouth C22 → special game" is almost guaranteed is four times, and a state advantageous to the player may be a game property in which a special game occurs four times in one set (in that case). May be configured such that, for example, the ratio of entry into the “battle mode” in <game progress flow 2> is 50%, and the ratio of re-entry into “battle mode” in <game progress flow 4> is 25%. Good).

<Irregular game progress flow>
In <Game Progress Flow 1>, a small hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, a small hit probability=1/1024) is also triggered by the ball entering the first main game starting opening A10. Therefore, if the small hit lottery is won, the "first main game small hit win" shown in the figure becomes, and the small hit game for one round is executed (for example, in the small hit game in this case, (2 open the big winning opening C20), and after the end of the small hitting game, a special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22) is executed. It is also possible to configure. Further, when the special game is finished, it is possible to shift to the "battle mode" shown in the figure. Here, the handling when winning the small hit lottery on the first main game side is not particularly limited, but when it is configured to win with an extremely low probability as in this example, in the small hit game At the time of execution, it is preferable to configure so that if the game balls are continuously shot aiming at the second big winning opening C20, entering the V winning opening C22 is substantially deterministic, Further, it is preferable that the special game for the maximum number of rounds that can be set (for example, 15 rounds) is executed after the end of the small hit game.

Next, FIG. 42 is an image diagram relating to a special game effect and the like in the second embodiment. The same figure illustrates the flow of a special game relating to whether or not to enter the “battle mode” described in detail in FIG. 41, and a series of game games of effects executed during the “battle mode”. .. First, during the special game executed in accordance with <game progression flow 1>, when it is planned to shift to the time shortening game state after the special game is finished (the big winning symbol on the first main game side is "7A" In the case), a "battle rush challenge success effect" (for example, an effect in which the protagonist discovers a treasure box and an enemy who will compete in the battle effect appears from the treasure box) is executed as an effect during the special game. After the end of the special game, it will shift to a time-reduced game state (so-called electric support state). That is, the "battle rush challenge success effect" is an effect for notifying the player that during the special game executed according to <game progression flow 1>, the game is to be shifted to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. It becomes the content. On the other hand, when it is not planned to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the special game (when the jackpot pattern on the first main game side is "2A"), "battle rush challenge failure" is given as an effect during the special game. "Effect" (for example, the protagonist discovers a treasure box, but the paper in which "Ska" is written appears from the treasure box) is executed, and after the end of the special game, the time reduction game state is not entered. That is, the "battle rush challenge failure effect" is an effect that notifies the player that during the special game executed according to <game progression flow 1>, the game will not shift to the time-saving game state after the special game ends. It becomes the content.

Next, according to <Game progression flow 2>, when the game state shifts to a time shortening game state (so-called electric support state), the second main game symbol fluctuates as a result of entering the second main game starting opening B10. , 1 second main game hold occurs during the symbol change. In this case, during the change of the symbol, "Battle standby effect" (an effect to notify that the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game is in a state of being committed, for example, an effect in which the hero and the enemy are conspicuous) Will be executed.

Next, according to <Game Progress Flow 3>, if a special game via a small hit game occurs, and the small hit symbol is the second main game time shift short hit small hit symbol {Transition trigger of the special game and time reduction. In the case of a small hit symbol that triggers a transition to the game state (so-called electric support state), and in this example, 7BK}, during the execution of the special game, the "first battle victory effect" (the appearance of the main character is After being displayed, a production in which the hero attacks and destroys the enemy is executed), and after the end of the special game, the time shortening game state (so-called electric support state) is entered. That is, the "first battle victory effect" is an effect that notifies the player that during the special game executed in accordance with <game progress flow 3>, the game is to be shifted to the time-reduced game state after the special game ends. It becomes the content. On the other hand, if a special game via a small hit game occurs in accordance with <Game progression flow 3>, and if the small hit symbol is not the second main game short-time shift small hit symbol, during execution of the special game, Do not shift to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) after the special game is executed, when the "first battle unwinning production" (the production of the enemy is displayed and the enemy prepares to attack the hero) is executed. Becomes That is, the "first battle non-winning effect" is to notify the player that during the special game executed in accordance with <game progress flow 3>, the game will not shift to the time-reduced game state after the special game ends. It will be the production content.

Here, when the "first battle victory effect" is executed, during the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol thereafter, the above-mentioned "battle standby effect" (the occurrence of a special game via the small hit game is generated. This is an effect for notifying that the state is affirmed, and for example, the effect will be to return to an effect in which the protagonist and the enemies squint. The type of the enemy executed at this timing may be different from the type of the enemy displayed in the "first battle victory effect". On the other hand, when the "first battle unwinning production" is executed, while the second main game symbol is changing thereafter, a further "battle standby production" (the occurrence of a special game via the small hit game is generated. It is an effect that informs that it is in a committed state, and also an effect that informs that the second main game hold is exhausted. For example, the enemy displayed in the "first battle unwinning effect" attacks the hero. Effect) is executed.

Next, in the case where the game has not transitioned to the time-saving game state (so-called electric support state) according to <Game progress flow 4> (that is, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the remaining second main game hold) In the case where it is executed and a new second main game hold does not occur), if a special game via the small hit game occurs according to <Game Progress Flow 3>, and the small hit symbol shifts to the second main game time shortening Small hitting pattern {is a small hitting pattern that becomes a trigger to shift to the special game and shifts to a time shortening game state (so-called electric support state), and in this example, 7BK}, if the special game is being executed "The second battle victory effect" (the effect that the main character prevents the enemy from attacking, then the main character attacks the enemy to defeat the enemy is executed) is executed, and the time is shortened after the special game ends. A game state (so-called electric support state) will be entered. That is, the "second battle victory effect" is the same as the "first battle victory effect", which is the effect content for notifying the player of the transition to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. , The contents of the production are story-related to the "first battle unwinning production". In addition, according to <game progression flow 4>, if the time has not transitioned to the game state (so-called electric support state) (that is, the second main game symbol fluctuation is executed based on the remaining second main game hold) In the case where the second main game hold does not newly occur), in the case of a special game that goes through the small hit game according to <Game progress flow 3>, and the small hit symbol is the second main game short-time shift small If it is not a winning symbol, during the execution of the special game, the "second battle unwinning production" (production in which the main character is destroyed by the enemy) is executed, and after the special game is finished, the time-saving game state (so-called electric power). It will not shift to support state). That is, the "second battle non-winning presentation effect" is the same as the "first battle non-winning presentation effect", because it is the effect content for notifying the player that the time-saving game state will not be entered after the special game ends. However, the content of the production is story-related with the "first battle unwinning production". In addition, when the "second battle victory effect" is executed, during the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol thereafter, the above-mentioned "battle standby effect" (the occurrence of the special game via the small hit game is guaranteed. This is an effect for notifying that it is in the state of being performed, and, for example, the effect is to return to an effect in which the hero and the enemy stare. The type of the enemy executed at this timing may be different from the type of the enemy displayed in the "second battle victory effect". On the other hand, when the "second battle unwinning effect" is executed, the game is returned to the normal game, so that the game is switched to the normal game state effect.

With such a configuration, in the second embodiment, a seamless effect that the state advantageous to the player continues unless the hero is defeated by the enemy, during the fluctuation of the main game symbol and during the small hit game special. It can be executed during the game. That is, it starts from "battle rush challenge success production" (production corresponding to the execution of the special game that occurred on the first main game side), and "battle standby production" (via the small hitting game after the execution of the special game) The production corresponding to the occurrence of the new special game) → "First battle victory production" (production corresponding to the execution of the new special game) → "Battle standby production" or "Battle standby "Production" (production from the end of the execution of the special game to the occurrence of a new special game via the small hit game) → "First battle unwinning production" (corresponding to the execution of the new special game (Production) → "Battle standby production" (production corresponding to after the execution of the new special game until the occurrence of a further special game through the small hit game) → "Second battle victory production" (the further special As long as the seamless effect of "the effect corresponding to the execution of the game" → "Battle standby effect" continues to be generated, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state for the player is continuing. ..

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is set to one, the game is loopable in one set of two occurrences of the special game, but the second main game side. There is no problem even if the upper limit number is changed, for example, the second upper game side has an upper limit number of 3, and the game playability is such that the special game occurs four times in one set, and the special game is performed. May be provided in four stages (first to fourth battle winning effects and first to fourth battle unwinning effects). In such a configuration, as an example of each battle effect, the first battle victory effect, the effect in which the hero's appearance is shown, the first battle unwinning effect, the effect in which the enemy's appearance is shown, and the second battle Victory effect, hero attack, second battle unwinning effect, enemy attack, third battle victory effect, hero defending enemy attack, third battle unwinning effect, hero May be an effect of attacking an enemy, a fourth battle victory effect, an effect in which the main character stands up, a fourth battle unwinning effect, an effect in which the main character is unable to stand up and defeated.

In addition, while staying in "Battle Mode", winning the big hit when the second main game wins a small hit is the main flow to increase the number of balls that are held. In the case where the big hit on the second main game side is won without passing through the small hit, a configuration (specific form) different from that in the case where the big hit is won may be executed when the small hit is won. Of course, for example, when “7B” is won, an effect such as “the hero performs a special move” may be executed. It should be noted that it is preferable to execute the production in the specific mode when the player has a high profit (in this example, when the big hit related to “7B” is won), and when the big profit is the maximum profit (for example, a round). It is more preferable that the number is the maximum, and that the big hit that shifts to the time shortening game state after the big hit ends). In addition, even when the big hit is won with the small win, the effect of the specific mode may be executed. For example, the maximum number of rounds on the second main game side with the small win (( In this example, the jackpot (7R-1) of which the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot when the jackpot winning is triggered is 15BK, among the jackpots (15KB of the 7R) The small hitting pattern in which the number of rounds is 4R is 7BK-2, and in the present example, the effect of the specific mode may be executed when the big hit with 7BK-1 as a trigger) is won. In such a case, the maximum number of rounds is executed after the jackpot is completed, the game is configured to shift to a time-reduced gaming state (not only the winning gaming balls of the jackpot but also the gaming state after the jackpot is finished). It is also desirable to configure so as to be advantageous to the player).

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the small hit winning probability according to the second main game is set to a higher probability (probability of almost every variation winning) than in the present embodiment. The occurrence of one special game is almost definite for each one of the holdings related to the second main game. Therefore, when the hold upper limit related to the second main game is one, when shifting to the time shortening game state, one hold related to the second main game occurs → The symbol fluctuation related to the generated hold ( (Small variation is a small hit) is executed → One new hold related to the second main game occurs during the executed symbol change, a series of game progresses, and thereafter, two special games Is almost deterministic. Therefore, even if the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state after the execution of the first special game, if the time reduction game state shifts after the execution of the second special game, further special game 2 Since the occurrence of the number of times becomes almost definite, as long as the game continues to shift to the time-reduced game state after the execution of one of the two times of special games, the game is given endlessly by the execution of special games. It is possible to realize the game performance of being continued (Of course, this example is just an example, and if the holding upper limit number related to the second main game and the transition ratio to the time shortening game state after execution of the special game are changed, , It is possible to achieve various ball specs).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, by shifting to a time-reduced gaming state (so-called electric support state) after execution of the special game relating to the first main gaming symbol, "small hit→V winning hole C22 It is configured so that it is almost assured that a game advantageous to the player, such as "ball entry→special game", will be executed twice, and during the game advantageous to the player, the time-saving game after the special game is finished again. If the state can be changed, it is almost guaranteed that the game advantageous to the player will be executed twice again, and the game advantageous to the player will be looped in one set twice, creating a novel game property. It will be possible. In addition, by performing a seamless effect during the period in which the balls are continuously provided to the player, it is possible to always feel as if the number of game balls is increasing during the period, which enhances the interest of the game. .

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, based on the stopped big hit symbol or small hit symbol, regardless of the game state at the time when the big hit symbol or small hit symbol is stopped, the game after the special game executed after that is finished. Although it is configured to determine the state, the method of determining the game state after the end of the special game is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration that is a method of determining a game state after the end of a special game, which is different from that of the second embodiment, will be referred to as a first modified example from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. To do. Furthermore, Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment is also a modification example based on the second embodiment, and therefore any configuration shown in the second embodiment is a modification example 1 from the second embodiment. It is also noted that it is applicable.

In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the first main game time saving counter MP52c-1 for managing the time saving number related to the first main game, and the second main game saving time saving counter MP52c-1 for managing the second main game It has the main game short time counter MP52c-2.

First, FIG. 43 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is that three small hit symbols are provided on the second main game side. With this configuration, in the first modification from the second embodiment, based on the type of stopped big hit symbol or small hit symbol and the big hit symbol or small hit symbol stop game state, the big hit symbol Alternatively, it can be configured to determine the game state after the end of the special game related to the small hit symbol (details will be described later).

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 12 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1511 (second variation 1) to step 1520 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1511 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 is By referring to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the stopped main game symbol is the first main game symbol. If Yes in step 1511 (second variation 1), in step 1512 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game short working time counter MP52c-1, and the counter value is 0 It is determined whether the value is large. If Yes in step 1512 (second variation 1), in step 1514 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the first main game short working time counter MP52c-1. Next, in a step 1516 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first main game short working time counter MP52c-1, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1516 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second variation 1).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1511 (second variation 1), in step 1518 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, and the counter value is It is determined whether the value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1518 (second variation 1), in step 1519 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the second main game short working time counter MP52c-2 by 1. Next, in a step 1520 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game time saving counter MP52c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1520 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1521 (second variation 1).

Next, in a step 1521 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero-clears) the first main game time reduction counter MP52c-1. Next, in a step 1522 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero-clears) the second main game short time counter MP52c-2, and shifts to the step 1508. In addition, in the case of No in step 1512 (second variation 1), step 1516 (second variation 1), step 1518 (second variation 1) or step 1520 (second variation 1), the next process (step 1600) Process). Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when either the counter value of the first main game short time counter MP52c-1 or the second main game short time counter MP52c-2 becomes 0. , The time-saving game state is configured to end. Further, by configuring in this way, when the second main game side changes by 1 during the time shortening game state and wants to end the time shortening game state, if the first main game side changes unintentionally Also, the time-saving game state can be configured not to end, and the game machine can be user-friendly. Further, when the second main game side is configured to be able to execute a plurality of fluctuations in the time shortening game state, a skilled player visually confirms the second main game symbol display portion B21g and confirms the small hit symbol, After the special game triggered by the small hitting game related to the small hitting design, if the small hitting design does not become the time shortening game state after the end of the special game, the firing of the game ball toward the second big winning opening C20 is stopped, and the time After the next change in the shortened gaming state, there is a risk of aiming for the winning of the small hit symbol which is in the time shortened gaming state after the special game with the small hit game as an opportunity, so the second main game short working time counter MP52c- The initial value of 2 is once (preventing such a game method). Further, the time-reduced game state may be ended when the total number of fluctuations relating to the first main game and the fluctuations relating to the second main game reaches a predetermined value.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1615 (second variation 1) and step 1616 (second variation 1) to step 1628 (second variation 1), the purpose of which is during execution of a small hit game. When the player enters the V winning opening C22 in, the execution start timing of the special game based on the winning is to be the time of entering the "specific entrance". That is, in step 1615 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether the auxiliary game starting opening entrance waiting flag is off. To judge. If Yes in step 1615 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1602, and if No, proceeds to step 1624 (second variation 1).

Further, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1616 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the first main game short time counter MP52c-1. Next, in a step 1618 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 resets (zero clears) the second main game short time counter MP52c-2. Next, in step 1620 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 is an auxiliary game starting opening entrance instruction command (a command to enter a game ball into the auxiliary game starting opening H10, for example, "Display big hit starts when you enter the auxiliary game starting port") is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700). Next, in step 1622 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 turns on the auxiliary game starting opening entrance waiting flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and step 1624. Go to (2nd change 1).

Next, in step 1624 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1624 (second variation 1), in step 1626 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 has the auxiliary game starting entrance ball in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn off the waiting flag. Next, in step 1628 (second variation 1), the special game control means MP30 indicates that the auxiliary game starting opening has been entered (the game ball enters the auxiliary starting opening H10 and the special game is started). It is a command for informing, for example, "display big hit starts") is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 1612. To do. If No in step 1624 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (process in step 1800).

With this configuration, the execution start timing of the special game can be set at the time of entering the "specific entrance" (in this example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10), and in particular, the execution of the small hit game. In the case of entering the V winning opening C22 inside, the execution start timing of the special game based on the entrance can be set at the time of entering the "specific entrance" {of course, via the small hit game. It is also possible to set the execution start timing of the special game (for example, after the stop display of the big hit symbol) that has occurred without occurrence to the time of entering the "specific entrance". In this example, the “specific entrance” is defined as the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and the auxiliary game starting opening H10 serves as the entrance for the variation of the auxiliary game symbol and the entrance for starting the execution of the special game. Although it shares two roles with the mouth, the present invention is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game starting opening H10 has only the role of the entrance opening that serves as a variation trigger of the auxiliary game symbol, and the special game. The entrance for triggering the execution of the above may be separately provided. In addition, the game ball that has entered the "specific entrance" may be configured to enter the variable winning opening that is opened when the special game is executed (in this case, the so-called "specific entrance" If a variable winning opening is provided downstream of the "mouth" and the player enters the "specific winning opening", the variable winning opening is immediately opened without providing a so-called jackpot start demonstration time).

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1766 (second variation 1) to step 1774 (second variation 1), that is, after the end of the special game related to the V winning opening C22 in step 1760 (second). If there is, in step 1766 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the small hit symbol that triggered the entry into the V winning opening C22 is shortened. Transition small hit pattern (a small hit pattern that will shift to the time shortening game state after the special game related to V winning in the small hit game related to the small hit pattern, in this example, 7BK) Isn't it? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1766 (second variation 1), in step 1768 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and enters the V winning opening C22. It is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning which is the trigger of is the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 1768 (second variation 1), in step 1770 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b to enter the V winning opening C22. The small hit pattern that became the trigger of the time saving limited time saving transition small hit design (only in the case of the time shortening game state at the time of winning the relevant small hit, it is related to the V winning in the small hit game related to the relevant small hit design It is a small hit symbol that will be shifted to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game, and it is determined whether or not it is 5BK in this example. If Yes in step 1770 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1772 (second variation 1). Even if the result of step 1762 (second) is Yes or the result of step 1766 (second variation 1) is No, the process proceeds to step 1772 (second variation 1).

Next, in a step 1772 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (99 times in this example) in the first main game short time counter MP52c-1. Next, in a step 1774 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) in the second main game time saving counter MP52c-2, and shifts to a step 1756. . It should be noted that a predetermined number of times set in the first main game short time counter MP52c-1 (99 times in this example) and a predetermined number of times set in the second main game short time counter MP52c-2 (one time in this example) Is 100 times. If No in step 1768 (second variation 1) or step 1770 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800).

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the right-hand hitting instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 of FIG. 22 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2064 (second variation 1) to step 2074 (second variation 1), and the purpose is to enter the V winning opening C22 particularly during the execution of the small hit game. When this is done, the player is informed to shoot a game ball aiming at the "specific ball entrance" (in this example, the auxiliary game starting hole H10). That is, when the special game is not being executed in step 2058, in step 2064 (second variation 1), the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and waits for the special game to start. It is determined whether the medium flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2064 (second variation 1), in step 2066 (second variation 1), the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and starts the auxiliary game from the main side. It is determined whether or not a mouth-entry instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2066 (second variation 1), in step 2068 (second variation 1), the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 is waiting for a special game to start in the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11b. Turn on the flag. Next, in step 2070 (second variation 1), the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control processing of step 2700, the sub-sub control unit SS Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the first right-handing instruction display plays a role of an effect of urging a game ball to enter the auxiliary game starting opening H10 in order to start a special game. There is. Note that the effect mode is not limited to this, and may be the second right-handing instruction display, or in addition to the right-handing instruction display, a special effect (for example, the effect display device SG displays “Auxiliary game start opening H10 You may provide the effect of displaying "start big hit when you enter the ball" (that is, when you enter the V winning opening C22 during the execution of the small hit game, the execution start timing of the special game based on the entrance Since it is a special game property that is not available in conventional gaming machines, such as when entering a "specific entrance", it is possible to give a clear instruction notification to the player, such as a special effect. It may be suitable). In addition, in the case of No in step 2066 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2062.

In addition, in the case of No in step 2064 (second variation 1), in step 2072 (second variation 1), the right-handing instruction display control means SM26 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and assists from the main side. It is determined whether or not a game start opening entrance instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2072 (second variation 1), in step 2074 (second variation 1), the right hitting instruction display control means SM26 is waiting for a special game to start in the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11b. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Even if No in step 2072 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit or the small hit (whether it is the time-reduced game state or the non-time-reduced game state) ), the game state (time saving transition rate) after the special game related to the big hit or the small hit can be made different, and the number of times that the second main game symbol can be changed once in the time shortened game state is once. Because it is only, it is possible to prevent the execution of unfair game methods such as a game method in which a game ball is not inserted into the V winning opening C22 until a high profit small hit symbol is won, and the first main game side changes unintentionally. Even if it happens, the time-saving game state can be configured not to end, and the game machine can be user-friendly.

In addition, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, after a big hit (the condition device operation flag is turned on upon the stop of the big hit symbol or the entry into the V winning opening C22 as a trigger), a special By configuring the special game to start by entering the game ball into the entrance (in this example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10) that triggers the transition to the game, the player is Even during a period in which a high profit for a person continues), it is possible to stop the firing of the game ball at the timing when the condition device operation flag is turned on and reduce fatigue caused by continuing the game for a long time. (For example, the game can be interrupted and the rest can be taken as a rest), and the game machine can be user-friendly.

(Third Embodiment)
In the embodiment shown so far, when the time shortening game state is entered, the second main game side hold is configured to be generated until the second main game side hold upper limit is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the game is shifted to the time-reduced game state, the expected number of reserve numbers on the second main game side that can be generated may be changed, With such a configuration, it is possible to construct a new game property that cannot be achieved by the embodiments described above. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the third embodiment is also a modified example based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the third embodiment {however. In the following examples in the third embodiment, it is assumed that the variable fixed time related to the main game symbol is uniform in a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in order to realize the special game property. }.

Incidentally, in the third embodiment, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency, and the variation mode for the main game symbol at the limited frequency period are determined. A table to be referred at the time, which is a limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta including a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game And a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (flag ON/OFF, etc.).

First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1201 (third) and step 1247-1 (third) to step 1247-4 (third), that is, step 1201 (third), auxiliary game symbol control The means MP11-H refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the electric auditors standby state flag is off. If Yes in step 1201 (third), the process proceeds to step 1202, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1247-3 (third).

Next, after closing the electric accessory in step 1244, in step 1247-1 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets a standby time timer MP11t-H2 for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). ) Set and start. Next, in step 1247-2 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the electric accessory standby flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the step Move to 1247-3 (third).

Next, in step 1247-3 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the standby time timer MP11t-H2 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1247-3 (third), in step 1247-4 (third), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, which is electrically operated. The standby state for the accessory is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1246. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1247-3 (third), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1300). In this way, by configuring the second main game start port electric accessory B11d to be able to be opened and closed again after the waiting time (5 seconds in this example) after closing, the fluctuation time determined in the time reduction game state It is possible to stabilize the number that can generate the second main game hold within, the production related to the fact that the hold has occurred, the number of times the second main game start port electric auditors product B11d is opened in the time shortening game state. It is possible to secure the time for executing such an effect, an effect related to whether or not the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the time reduction game state, and the like. Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in the time reduction game state may be set to a long time (for example, 5 seconds), and the same effect as the standby time may be realized. However, when the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is set to a long time (for example, 5 seconds), the variation related to the auxiliary game symbol that has begun to vary during the special game (especially, variation in the non-time shortened gaming state) is concerned. When straddling the game end timing, there is a variation in the timing at which the variation related to the auxiliary game symbol next to the variation is started, so that there is variation in the second main game hold number that can be generated during the time reduction game state. It is likely to occur. Therefore, for example, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is set to be as short as possible and the special game end timing and the variation display start timing of the auxiliary game symbol are combined, and the standby time (the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is It is effective to use a fixed period that does not occur unless it is released) to stabilize the number that can cause the second main game suspension within the variable time determined in the time-reduced game state.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402 (third), the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and whether or not the hold of the first main game symbol does not exist. Check. If Yes in step 1402 (third), in step 1400(2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). . On the other hand, if No in step 1402 (third), in step 1400(1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). Transition. Thus, in the third embodiment, the first main game hold is given priority over the second main game hold (however, the first main game hold is not limited to this, and the first main game hold is better than the first main game hold). The second main game hold may be preferentially digested.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 49 in the third embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1449 (third), step 1550, and step 1449-1 (third) to step 1449-12 (third), that is, stop of the main game symbol in step 1410. After determining the symbol, in step 1449 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and sets the limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B). It is determined whether or not either the flag or the limited frequency C flag is on. If Yes in step 1449 (third), in step 1550 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1450.

In addition, after turning on the conditional device operation flag in step 1446, in step 1449-1 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the limited frequency in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on the B flag. Next, in step 1449-2 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the medium profit giving command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the completion of the big hit or the small hit to be executed for the player). A command for notifying that the profit ratio is medium) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

On the other hand, after turning on the small hit flag in step 1448, in step 1449-3 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. However, the stop symbol is a high-gain-providing small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the variation time related to the second main game symbol after the small hit game is a high profit rate for the player, in this example, 7BK) Or not. In the case of Yes in step 1449-3 (third), in step 1449-4 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 has the limited frequency C flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-5 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines that the high profit grant command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the completion of the big hit or the small hit to be executed is for the player). A command for notifying that the profit rate is high is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1449-3 (third), at step 1449-6 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. For reference, the stop symbol is a medium profit granting small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the variation time relating to the second main gaming symbol after the small hit game is a medium profit rate for the player, and in this example. 4BK). If Yes in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-7 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on. Next, in step 1449-8 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the medium profit giving command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the completion of the big hit or the small hit to be executed for the player). A command for notifying that the profit ratio is medium) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

On the other hand, if No in step 1449-6 (third), in step 1449-9 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines that the limited frequency in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Turn on the A flag. Next, in step 1449-10 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines that the low profit grant command (the variation time relating to the second main game symbol after the completion of the big hit or the small hit to be executed is for the player). A command for notifying that the profit ratio is low) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to step 1449-11 (third).

Next, in step 1449-11 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 sets an initial value (10 times in this example) in the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1449-12 (third), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets an initial value (in this example, once) in the second main game limited frequency counter MN52c-2, and then in step 1500. Transition.

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (third) of FIG. 50 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1552, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b and determines whether or not the limited frequency A flag is ON. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta) to determine the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Then, the process proceeds to step 1562. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, in step 1556, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b and determines whether or not the limited frequency B flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table B (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta) to determine the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. Then, the process proceeds to step 1562. On the other hand, if No in step 1556, in other words, if the limited frequency C flag is on, in step 1560, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 stores the limited frequency table C (limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta). With reference to this, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1562.

Next, in step 1562, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and determines whether or not the variation is a variation related to the first main game. If Yes in step 1562, in step 1564, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1566, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the first main game limited frequency counter MN52c-1, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1566, in step 1570, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the limited frequency flags (limited frequency A flag, limited frequency B flag, limited frequency) in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. The C flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1562, in step 1568, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the second main game limited frequency counter MN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1570 (second main game). Since the initial value set in the limited frequency counter MN52c-2 is 1, the counter value after subtraction is not referred to). If No in step 1566, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1450).

Next, FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process in the third embodiment. The content of this table has a configuration in which a plurality of big hit symbols are provided in the first modification from the second embodiment. Further, regarding the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main game table 3, it is difficult to execute the variation related to the second main game in the non-time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, the first main game side, Since the limited frequency table is referred to by both of the two main games, it is virtually not referred to.

Next, FIG. 53 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table in the third embodiment. The figure includes a limited frequency table A, a limited frequency table B, and a limited frequency table C. The variation mode is uniquely determined in all the tables, and the difference between the limited frequency tables is the content on the second main game side. The variation time related to the second main game side is "when referring to the limited frequency table C>when referring to the limited frequency table B>when referring to the limited frequency table A", and in the time shortening game state where there is only one variation. Due to the fluctuation of the second main game side, the expected value that can cause the second main game suspension is different. In the third embodiment, the variation related to the second main game hold is that the small win is almost won, and the special game related to the V winning is executed when the small hit is triggered. Therefore, the second main game hold number Is directly linked to the player's profit. Therefore, the profit rate of the player is also “when the limited frequency table C is referred to> when the limited frequency table B is referred to> when the limited frequency table A is referred”. The number that can cause the second main game suspension described above is the standby time (5 seconds) related to the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. Is almost non-existent, about 1 to 2 when the limited frequency table B is referred to, and about 4 to 5 when the limited frequency table C is referred to.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1776 (third) and step 1777 (third), that is, in step 1776 (third), the specific game control means MP50 causes the first main game short time counter MP52c. Set -1 a predetermined number of times (10 times). Next, in a step 1777 (third), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number (one time) in the second main game short working time counter MP52c-2, and then shifts to a step 1756. As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the first modification from the second embodiment, one of the first main game short time counter MP52c-1 and the second main game short time counter MP52c-2 is used. When the value becomes 0, the time-reduced gaming state is finished. The number of times saved and the number of times limited are the same.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2120 (third) and step 2122 (third), that is, after temporarily storing the hold information in step 2106, in step 2120 (third), the drawing hold information is displayed. The display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is the second main game side hold. If Yes in step 2120 (third), in step 2122 (third), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets a command for executing the second main game suspension occurrence effect (display command transmission control in step 2700). In the processing, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2118. Here, the lower right part of the figure is a second main game hold occurrence image diagram. As described above, since the generated second main game holding number is directly connected to the profit of the player, an effect for notifying that a highly profitable event has occurred for the player will be executed.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 22 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2500 (third), that is, after the big hit start display is executed in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 will be described later in step 2500 (third). , Special game effect display control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the special game effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) of FIG. 45 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a high profit giving command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 notifies the player that after the special game is finished, it will be highly profitable (for example, "battle effect execution→win with special move"). Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, if No in step 2502, the process moves to step 2506.

Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the medium profit giving command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 gives an effect (for example, "battle effect execution→win by punch") of notifying that it will be a medium profit for the player after the special game ends. The command to be executed is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 2510. On the other hand, if No in step 2506, the process moves to step 2510.

Next, in step 2510, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the low profit giving command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 executes an effect (for example, “battle effect execution→defeat”) that informs the player of a low profit after the special game ends. The command is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2420). On the other hand, if No in step 2510, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2420).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the limited frequency table is configured to be referred to after the special game is finished, and the big hit symbol or the small hit is stopped immediately before the execution of the special game. The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined based on the design. In addition, the variation related to the second main game hold is almost won, and the special game is won by entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game (the variation related to the second main game hold is special. It is configured to be directly connected to the game), and the variable number of times the second main game can be changed in the time shortened game state is only one change. Since it is configured in this way, the change time of only one change However, the number of possible second holding occurrences will be influenced, and the player will pay attention to one change after the end of the special game.

In the third embodiment, the effect during the special game is configured to suggest the limited frequency table (or the variation time relating to the second main game symbol) that is referred to after the special game is finished, The present invention is not limited to this example, and the profit mode may not be definitely notified in the effect during the special game, and the result of the profit mode may be notified in the effect related to the change after the end of the special game. , The production during the special game and the production after the special game may be configured to be executed (for example, "battle production → defeat" during the special game, "revival victory production at the start of fluctuation after the special game is finished. "etc).

In addition, the basic idea for realizing the game property of the third embodiment is a period in which a time shortened game state (that is, a state in which the second main game start port electric auditors product B11d is likely to be opened) is maintained. It is to vary the expected value relating to the total number of balls entering the second main game starting opening B10. Therefore, the game characteristics that can be realized based on such an idea are not limited to the examples described above in the third embodiment, and various game characteristics can be considered, but the basic idea is to reduce the time. A method of changing the expected value related to the total period length in which the game state is maintained, and the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d is in the open state (second main game start during the period in which the time shortening game state is maintained. The method is largely divided into a method of varying an expected value related to the total period length for maintaining an open state where the player can enter the mouth B10). Therefore, more specific methods for each method will be listed, but it should be supplemented that any combination of these listed methods is possible.

<Method of changing expected value related to total period length in which time-saving game state is maintained>
-A method of varying the variation time of the main game symbol, as illustrated in the third embodiment-A technique of varying the variation fixed time after the variation display of the main game symbol, as exemplified in this embodiment-Small The opening interval period (so-called start demo period (waiting period until the first opening)) or end demo period (the final opening after the final opening) during the execution of the winning game Waiting period until the end of the game), a method of varying the closing period when performing a series of operations of opening → closing → opening} A method of varying the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol (however, in this case, It is preferable to increase the probability that the result of the judgment regarding the main game symbol will be lost.)

<Method of varying the expected value related to the total period length in which the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d maintains the open state during the period in which the time shortened game state is maintained>
-Method of changing the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol, or method of changing the fixed fixed time after the variation display of the auxiliary game symbol-Winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol (selection probability of the hit symbol "D1" in this embodiment) The method of changing the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d opening method (opening time) (in this case, by changing the opening time once to the second main game starting port B10 The expected number of balls will be variable)

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, by configuring the limited frequency table to be referred to based on the small hit symbol, in the so-called electric support state, the expected number that can cause the second main game hold can be changed. However, the game playability can be realized without using the limited frequency table. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the modifications from the third embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, Modification 1 from the third embodiment is also a modification based on the third embodiment, and therefore any configuration shown in the third embodiment is a modification 1 from the third embodiment. It is also noted that it is applicable.

First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 1247-1 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1244, after closing the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d, step 1247-1 (first 3 change 1), the second main game starting port electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B sets a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) to the waiting time timer MP11t-H2, and starts the timer, Move to 1247-2 (3rd). In this way, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the waiting time from the closing of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d to the start of the symbol variation of the new auxiliary game symbol is set to 1 second. By doing so, when the time shortened game state (so-called electric support state) is reached, the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol is made as short as possible (0.01 seconds in this example), and the second main game start While opening the mouth electric accessory B11d immediately, the waiting time from the second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d is closed until the symbol variation of the new auxiliary game symbol is started is stabilized ( As a result, the time interval from the occurrence of a certain second main game hold to the occurrence of the next second main game hold is stabilized).

Next, FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the first modification from the third embodiment. In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, in the main game table 3, the time reduction game state of the second main game side and the variable time determined in the table at the time of hitting (at the time of big hitting and small hitting), the pending digestion It is configured to be determined depending on the subsequent second main game holding number. Incidentally, in consideration of the control processing of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d described above, when "B0 (0.5 seconds)" is selected as the variation mode of the second main game symbol, It becomes difficult to generate the second main game hold during symbol change, and if "B2 (15 seconds)" is selected, the second main game hold occurs up to the maximum number (4) during the symbol change. It is configured to be easy (the second main game starting opening is the second main game starting opening when the waiting time of the electric accessory B11d is 1 second, and one game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10). (Because the opening of the electric accessory B11d is completed). Incidentally, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the variable time determined by the table of the time shortening game state on the second main game side and the time of hit (big hit, small hit) is It is configured to be determined depending on the number of 2 main game holdings, and "B2 (15 seconds)" is selected at about 1/10 of the case where the number of second main game holdings is 0, and the second main game is selected. When the number of hold is 1-3, it is configured to select "B2 (15 seconds)" for each change, but the variable time selected when the number of second main game hold is 1-3 (Or, the variable time selection candidate) is not limited to this, and a long time that can be selected when the second main game holding number is 0, such as a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per fluctuation is selected (this example). Then, a variation time different from the variation time of 15 seconds) may be selected when the second main game holding number is 1 to 3.

Further, the table surrounded by the dotted line of the main game table 3, that is, the non-time reduction game state, and the table related to the second main game are difficult to be executed as in the third embodiment. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency (the limited frequency table, etc.) is deleted (although this is an essential configuration in the third embodiment, a change from the third embodiment In Example 1, it is not a mandatory configuration).

In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, in the table of the time shortening game state and the hit time (big hit, small hit time) of the second main game side, the variable time determined after the hold digestion is completed. Although it is configured to be determined depending on the 2 main game hold number, it is not limited to this, the variable time determined by the table is determined depending on the second main game hold number before the hold digestion. May be configured, and if so configured, in the rush zone described below, the fluctuation time when the pre-digestion hold to be digested is 1 can be reliably set to 15 seconds, It is possible to adopt a configuration that does not impair the playability of this example. That is, if it is configured to determine the variation time depending on the number of holds before the hold is exhausted, when a certain change ends in the state of one hold and the hold is exhausted, and when the hold is 0, the game is played. Since there is a characteristic that the table for determining the variable time to be referred to can be made different when one ball enters the main game starting opening, this characteristic is provided in the first modification from the third embodiment. Can be used.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1777-1 (third variation 1) and step 1777-2 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1777-1 (third variation 1), a specific game. The control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main game jackpot symbol (in this example, only 7A). If Yes in step 1777-1 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1777 (third variation), and if No, in step 1777-2 (third variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 By referring to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, it is determined whether or not the special game that has ended is the special game triggered by the second main game time shortening transition small hit symbol (7BK). If Yes in step 1777-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1776 (third), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the end condition of the time shortening game state is that the first main game symbol has finished changing 10 times, or the second main game symbol has finished changing once, However, the end condition of the time-reduced game state is not limited to this, for example, the total of the variation end times of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), etc. May be In addition, the end condition of the above-mentioned time reduction game state may be compounded, and for example, the total of the variation end times of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol reaches the predetermined number A (for example, 10 times), One of the variation end number of the main game symbol reaches a predetermined number B (for example, 8 times), or the variation end number of the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined number C (for example, 5 times), which satisfies either In the case of, the time-reduced game state may be configured to end.

Next, FIG. 61 is a game progress flowchart in the first modification from the third embodiment. The flow of the game shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Game progression flow 1>
In the case of the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to open the state, a so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is shot at the mouth A10 (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. Then, when the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability=1/234), which is carried out when the first main game starting opening A10 is entered, is shown in the figure. The first main game jackpot wins", and after the fluctuation of the symbols of the first main game symbols based on the win ends (after the jackpot symbols of the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for two rounds is executed (in this example, the first big winning opening C10 is opened, and “15 prize balls”ד9 counts”=“135 balls” per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, "rush challenge zone" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is a game state in which it is easy to open, Since the state shifts to the so-called electric power support state = time saving state), the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (by making a so-called right strike) to advance the game. , It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting port B10 (with the entry into the second main game starting port B10 as a trigger, the winning/discarding lottery on the second main game side and the symbol of the second main game symbol) Fluctuations are made). However, under this circumstance, a hold (second main game hold) on the second main game side has not occurred.

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player rushes into the "rush challenge zone" and the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game, and the second main A small hit due to a change in the second main game symbol related to the entry into the game starting opening B10 (in the win/no win lottery related to the second main game, it is almost a small win because the win is 1/1.01) When winning, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is completed (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hit game for one round is executed (In the present example, the second special winning opening C20 is opened, but in the case of the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game balls are continuously shot aiming at the second special winning opening C20, It is almost definite to enter the V winning opening C22). Here, the variation time related to the small hit symbol will depend on the number of reserves after the hold digestion, as in the "second main game symbol variation time" in the lower left part of the figure, at the time of "normal game", Also, during the big hit that occurred on the first main game side, the second main game hold is configured not to occur, so at the time of determining the variation time of the second main game symbol in the "rush challenge zone,""the number of hold 0 The variation time is determined by the distribution ratio of “(90% for 0.5 seconds, 10% for 15 seconds). Here, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, when the variation time is 0.5 seconds, the second main game hold is hardly generated during the variation of 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, the second main game hold is configured to be able to occur up to the upper limit number (4 in this example) during the fluctuation of 15 seconds. If the second main game suspension occurs, the game will shift to the "rush zone" shown in the figure.

<Game progression flow 4>
In the "rush challenge zone" shown in the figure, if the second main game hold could not be generated, after the small hit game is over, "second main game small hit → big hit in the figure" As shown in “, a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 2 rounds) (due to a ball entering the V winning opening C22) is a big hit (from the small hit game to the small hit game). The special game is called a big hit) (in this example, in the special game triggered by a small hit, the first big winning opening C10 is opened and "15 prize balls" x "9" per round. If the predetermined maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds, approximately 250 balls including the game balls obtained in the small hit game will remain as the player's balls).

<Game progress flow 5>
When the special game executed in the above <Game Progress Flow 4> ends, with a selection rate of 50% (for example, the second main game small hit symbol “which will be shifted to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game” 1AK", and the second main game small hit symbol "2AK" that will be transferred to the non-time shortened gaming state after the special game ends, exists and is selected by 1AK:2AK=1:1) Based on the small hit symbol related to the game, the game state after the end of the special game is determined. When the game state is the time reduction game state, the same operation as <game progress flow 3> is performed again, that is, the “rush challenge zone” is entered. On the other hand, when the game state is the non-time shortened game state, the non-time shortened game state and the second main game hold are 0, so the process shifts to the "normal game" shown in the figure. It will be.

<Game progress flow 6>
In addition, when the game moves to the "rush zone" in the above <Game Progress Flow 3>, after the end of the small hitting game, as in the above <Game Progress Flow 4>, the predetermined maximum number of rounds (this In the example, the special game for 2 rounds will be executed, but since the second main game hold exists, the second main game hold will be digested and the second main game will be held after the special game ends. The variation of the game symbol is executed, and the special game for a predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 2 rounds) is executed again (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22). In this way, until the second main game hold becomes 0, the special game for the predetermined maximum number of rounds (in this example, 2 rounds) continues (due to the entry into the V winning opening C22). Will be executed. Further, the variation time related to the second main game small hit symbol is always 15 seconds when the second main game suspension is present, as in the "second main game symbol variation time" in the lower left part of the figure. Since, is selected, if it is possible to shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the special game on the second main game side, the upper limit number of the second main game is held (4 in this example) during the fluctuating time of 15 seconds. ) Can be made to occur (on the other hand, when the special game on the second main game side is finished and the state is shifted to the non-time shortened game state, the second main game hold is generated during the fluctuating time of 15 seconds. Can't). Therefore, in the "rush zone", after the special game, before the non-time-reduced game state, and before the second main game hold becomes 0, after the end of any special game, transition to the time-reduced game state state If it is possible to make it possible, it is possible to create a gaming property in which a total of 5 special games, that is, one variation of the fluctuation and a second main game holding amount (for the upper limit number of 4) are almost promised. In addition, after the special game is finished in the "rush zone", when the non-time shortened game state and the number of the second main game hold are 0, the "normal game" in the figure is shifted to.

Further, as described above, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the table configuration for determining the variable time of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state is referred to by the number of reservations before the reservation is exhausted. It may be configured to determine the variable time by, and by doing so, the variable time for the last hold (hold when the second main game hold number becomes 1) in the "rush zone" is also long. It can be a time (a fluctuating time of 15 seconds).

With the above-mentioned configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, the table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, the number of holdings (holding digestion) It is configured to be determined depending on the subsequent hold number), and when a variable time of a long time (15 seconds in this example) is selected, the second main game hold hold is the upper limit number (in this example, Up to 4) can be generated, that is, it can be made to enter the Renso zone (“rush zone”), all the generated holdings have been digested, and after the special game relating to the last holding has ended If the time-saving game state is not entered, the extended villa zone (“rush zone”) will end. With this configuration, while the rush condition of the condominium zone (“rush zone”) is that a long-term variable time is selected, the continuation condition of the condominium zone (“rush zone”) is This means that it is possible to create a novel game property that is different from the rush condition and the continuation condition, which means that the hold is present.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the second main game hold in the non-time-reduced game state is exhausted and the small hit cannot be won, the game is returned to the left-hand hit and the game is advantageous for the player. Although the state is configured to end (return to the normal game), it may be configured to be in a state advantageous to the player again even after returning to left-handed play. An example of such a configuration will be described as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fourth embodiment is also a modified example based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the fourth embodiment.

First, FIG. 62 is a front view of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the second type non-electric accessory B12 is provided. The second type non-electrical accessory B12 is opened when the game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10, and two game balls enter the second type non-electrical accessory B12 from the opening timing. As a result, it is configured to be in a closed state. Further, when one game ball enters the second type non-electric accessory B12, one second main game hold occurs.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the maximum number of second main game hold is two, and when a game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10, a second type non-electric accessory The point is that when the game ball is opened and two game balls enter after the timing, the second non-electric accessory is closed. The second-class non-electrical accessory is an accessory that is not an electric accessory (an accessory that is not electrically driven and controlled), and is one that opens or expands the entrance of a winning opening other than the special winning opening. , A game ball is activated when it wins a specific winning opening other than the winning opening or passes through a specific gate.

Next, FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that two big hit symbols related to the first main game are provided, and a big hit pattern (in this example, 7A) that shifts to a time shortening game state after the big hit related to the first main game is over. And, a jackpot symbol (4A in this example) that shifts to the non-time shortening game state after the jackpot related to the first main game is provided.

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1778 (fourth) to step 1780 (fourth), that is, if it is after the end of the special game currently related to the first main game side in step 1752, step 1778. In (4th), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the big hit symbol in the stop is a time-saving shift big hit symbol (time-saving game state after the big hit ends. It is a big hit symbol that shifts to, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7A). In the case of Yes in step 1778 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1755 (time shortening game state is entered).

On the other hand, if it is not after the special game related to the first main game side in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 in the step 1779 (fourth), the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b- Refer to C, after the special game related to the second main game symbol is finished (only the special game related to the second main game jackpot symbol, the entry to the V winning opening when the second main game jackpot symbol is stopped It does not include the special game related to the ball). In the case of Yes in step 1779 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1755 (time shortening game state). On the other hand, if No in step 1779 (fourth), in other words, if it is after the end of the special game related to the V winning opening C22, in step 1780 (fourth), the specific game control means MP50 is 2 With reference to the main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game related to the small hit that was won in the time shortening game state. If Yes in step 1780 (fourth), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1800) (becomes a non-time-reduced game state), while if No, the process proceeds to step 1755 (a time-reduced game). State).

Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1778 (fourth), the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1800) (becomes a non-time shortening game state).

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, even if the second main game hold in the non-time shortened gaming state is exhausted and the small hit cannot be won, the left hit In the game returned to, the second main game hold can be generated by inserting the game ball into the second type non-electric accessory, and the game can be played again by winning the small hit related to the second main game. It is possible to create a novel game property in which the player can be brought into an advantageous state, that is, the advantageous state is returned.

(First modification from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the fourth embodiment, the second-class non-electrical accessory is provided to bring back the advantageous state for the player, but the configuration using the second-class non-electrical accessory is not limited to this. . An example of such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment is also a modification example based on the fourth embodiment, and therefore any configuration shown in the fourth embodiment is a modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment. It is also noted that it is applicable.

In the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the second type non-electrical accessory B12 of the fourth embodiment is the left second type non-electrical accessory B12, and the added second type non-electrical accessory is the right second. Seed as non-electric accessory B13. Further, the second main game starting port B10 of the fourth embodiment is no longer the main game starting port, and is a ball entry port for opening the left second type non-electric accessory B12 and the right second type non-electric auditor B13. Therefore, the non-electric accessory opening opening B15 is provided.

First, FIG. 66 is a front view of a gaming machine in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is that the second type non-electric accessory B12 is arranged on the right side of the board, and the second main game starting opening B10 of the fourth embodiment is a non-electric accessory opening ball entrance B15. That is.

With the above configuration, in the modified example 1 from the fourth embodiment, the occurrence of the second main game hold and the non-electrical accessory by the entry of the game ball into the second main game starting opening B10. Both of the opening and the opening are configured to be executed, but by arranging the second type non-electric accessory B12 on the right side of the board, the entry of the game ball into the non-electric accessory opening entrance B15 is possible. The second type non-electrical accessory is opened, and the entry of the game ball into the second type non-electrical accessory comes to execute the occurrence of the second main game hold, and the second main game starting opening B10 is executed. Different from the fourth embodiment in which the second type non-electric accessory B12 is opened and the second main game hold is caused due to entering a ball, one entrance is one action Can be configured to execute (when the player enters the right second-class non-electric accessory B13, the second main game hold occurs, etc.), and the fairness of the game is ensured.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the embodiment shown so far, various game features are realized by executing the special game when the player enters the V winning opening C22 during the small hitting game, but the V winning opening C22 is used. It is possible to create a new game property without providing (that is, using the characteristic of only the small hit game). Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fifth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the fifth embodiment.

First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the distribution winning object control process and the V winning opening winning determination process are deleted, and the number of winning balls of the second big winning opening C20 is 15. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since the small hitting game is continuous and the gaming property is obtained, the second big winning a prize C20 which is a big winning award related to the small hitting game is awarded. The number of balls is larger than that of the present embodiment (details will be described later).

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400(1) and (2) of FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1650 (fifth), that is, after the reservation information is shifted in step 1406, in step 1650 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50, which will be described later, falls lottery. Execution processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1408.

Next, FIG. 69 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, as a game state related to the main game, there is a so-called probability variation game state (function of increasing the winning probability of the main game symbol). Further, in the fifth embodiment, the V winning opening C22 is not provided, and the small hit itself is configured not to trigger the transition of the special game.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1650 (fifth) of FIG. 69 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is on. If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 wins with a predetermined probability (1/32 in this example), whether or not to fall from the falling lottery (probability variation game state to normal game state). Draw). Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the lottery result, and determines whether or not the lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1656, in step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (process of step 1408) Move to. Even if No in step 1652 or step 1656, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1408).

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1604-1 (fifth), that is, if the condition device operation flag is turned on in step 1602, special game control is performed in step 1604-1 (fifth). The means MP30 turns off the specific game flags (main game probability change flag/main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 17 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1752-1 (fifth), step 1755-2 (fifth) and step 1755-1 (fifth) to step 1755-3 (fifth), that is, step At 1752-1 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not it is after the special game related to the second main game side at present. In the case of Yes in step 1752-1 (fifth), in step 1755-2 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the stop symbol related to the special game that has ended Determines whether it is a long-time short-time special game symbol (7B in this example). If Yes in step 1755-2 (fifth), in step 1755-1 (fifth) the specific game control means MP50 causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined number of times A (a relatively large number of times, in this example, , 100 times) and shifts to step 1755-2 (fifth).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752-1 (fifth) or step 1755-2 (fifth), in step 1755-3 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 causes the time saving counter MP52c to store a predetermined number of times B( The number of times is relatively small. In this example, the number is set once, and the process proceeds to step 1755-2 (fifth). Next, in step 1755-2 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to step 1756.

Next, FIG. 73 is a game progress flowchart in the fifth embodiment. The flow of the game shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Game progression flow 1>
In the case of the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to open the state, a so-called non-electric support state), the player starts the first main game. A game ball is shot at the mouth A10 (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. Then, when the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability=1/256), which is carried out when the first main game starting opening A10 is entered, is shown in the figure. The first main game jackpot wins", and after the fluctuation of the symbols of the first main game symbols based on the win ends (after the jackpot symbols of the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( In this example, a special game for 10 rounds is executed (in this example, the first big winning opening C10 is opened, and “15 prize balls”ד9 counts”=“135 balls” are obtained per round. it can).

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, "Alpha rush" shown in the figure (probability variation game state, and the second main game start port electric auditorium product B11d is in the open state) Since the game state is easy, and the state shifts to the so-called electric power support state = time saving state), the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric auditorium product B11d (so-called right hitting). By advancing the game, it is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting opening B10 (with the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 as an opportunity, the winning/winning lottery on the second main game side and the 2 The main game symbol is changed).

<Game progress flow 3>
After that, the player rushes into "Alpha Rush", the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game, and the second main game. Winning a small hit due to fluctuations in the second main game symbol related to the entry into the starting opening B10 (in the winning/nothing lottery related to the second main game, since it is won at 1/1.01, it is almost a small hit) Then, after the symbol variation of the second main game symbol based on the winning is completed (after the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed), the small hit game for one round is executed ( In the present example, the second special winning opening C20 is opened, but unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, in the fifth embodiment, since the V winning opening C22 is not provided, the small hit prize is triggered. As a big hit is not won, but it is possible to win the ball in the small hit game itself). Further, the time-reduced game state ends with a single change in the main game symbol (shifts to the non-time-reduced game state), so the transition to the non-time-reduced game state occurs at the end of the variation related to the small hit. The probability variation game state does not end depending on the number of variations of the main game symbol. Also, during the fluctuation related to the small hit, the second main game hold can occur up to the upper limit number (four in this example), and the occurrence occurs even after the game state becomes the non-time shortened game state. As a result of the change related to the holding, the small wins are almost won, so during the "Alpha Rush", a total of five small wins will be won. In addition, in the small hit, it is possible to win 9 counts in the second big winning opening C20 (the second big winning opening C20 has the same structure as the present embodiment, and during the execution time of the small hit game. It is configured so that 9 balls can be won in the second big winning opening C20), and approximately 140 balls can be obtained by one small hit. Here, as shown in the "timing chart related to game progress" in the lower left of the figure, when the fluctuation of the second main game symbol in "Alpha Rush" is a fluctuation related to the small hit, the fluctuation end timing Since the time reduction game ends at, the non-time reduction game state is in effect during execution of the small hit. Since it is configured in this way, the game balls won by the small hit in "Alpha Rush" will not be the number of prize balls paid out in the time shortened game state, so the prize balls paid out in the time shortened game state It is possible to prevent the number from becoming too large, and it has become a fair game machine.

<Game progression flow 4>
After the end of "Alpha Rush", it shifts to the "fall probability lottery at probability change game 1/32" shown in the figure, and the game state is the probability change game state and the non-time shortening game state. The game ball is shot by aiming at the first main game starting opening A10 (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. In the fifth embodiment, in the probability variation game state, the end lottery of the probability variation game state (a lottery that shifts to the non-probability variation game state, so-called falling lottery) is executed at the start of variation of each variation. If the first main game side wins the jackpot before winning the falling lottery, the process shifts to the "first main game jackpot win" shown in the figure, while the first main game side If the falling lottery is won before the jackpot is won, the game will be transferred to the "normal game" shown in the figure. In addition, since the falling lottery is executed even during the changes in "Alpha Rush", if you win the falling lottery during "Alpha Rush", after the "Alpha Rush" ends, the "Normal" shown in the figure will appear. It will be shifted to "gaming".

<Game progress flow 5>
In addition, in the "Alpha Rush", the second main in which the maximum round (15R in this example) is executed in the fluctuation on the second main game side (up to 5 fluctuations including the fluctuation related to the second main game suspension) When the game jackpot symbol is won (in this example, the ratio of the second main game jackpot symbol in which the special game of 10R is executed is selected: The second main game jackpot symbol in which the special game of 15R is executed is selected. In the ratio = 99:1), the game will move to the "Super Alpha Rush" shown in the figure, and after the big hit of the 15R, 100 times will be saved, and the time saving game state will be given. And the remaining hold on the side of the second main game after the end of the fluctuation of the number of times shortened, the small hit is won, and the maximum 104 small hits are won, that is, "104 times" × The prize ball of “140 balls”=“14560 balls” will be obtained. If you win the jackpot in "Super Alpha Rush", the "Super Alpha Rush" will end and you will move to "Alpha Rush". By being configured in this way, in the "super alpha rush", rather than being in the probability variation game state without winning the fall lottery, it is won in the fall lottery and is in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and It becomes advantageous for the player to shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state) and to lower the jackpot probability. In addition, when the fluctuation of 100 times, which is the number of times saved in the "super alpha rush", is completed, the "normal game" shown in the figure is shifted to.

With the above-described configuration, in the fifth embodiment, the V winning opening C22 is not provided, and the structure of the second big winning opening C20 is the same as that of the present embodiment (the second big winning opening C20 when the small hit game is executed). The maximum number of game balls can be entered), and on the second main game side, small wins vary almost every time, and the second main game hold upper limit number is multiple (4 in this example) As a result, it is possible to win a predetermined number of game balls with one win for each small hit, and it is possible to create a novel game property in which a game ball is won with consecutive small hits. .

In the fifth embodiment, the probability varying game state may not be provided as the game state relating to the main game, and like the present embodiment, the game state relating to the main game is the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state). ) And the time reduction game state only.

In the fifth embodiment, the probability variation game state ends by winning the falling lottery, but the configuration is changed to the probability variation game state by a predetermined number of variations (for example, 10 variations). May be configured so as not to win the falling lottery (the probability variation game state does not end), and may be configured to execute the falling lottery in each variation after the predetermined number of variations have elapsed (in the case of such a configuration). Should be configured so that they will not fall during the "Alpha Rush"). In addition, the special game and the special game as an effect mode similar to the effect in the special game in which the effect executed in the "Alpha rush" in the fifth embodiment is shifted to the "Alpha rush". You may comprise so that the production|generation which is one special game may be performed continuously with "alpha rush."

(Sixth Embodiment)
In addition to the configuration of the embodiment shown so far, it is possible to create a new game nature with a configuration having a small hit and a V winning opening C22. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modified example based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the sixth embodiment.

First, FIG. 74 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that two auxiliary game starting ports are provided. That is, when the player hits left, it is easy to enter, and when the player hits right, it is difficult (or impossible) to enter the auxiliary game starting port is the first auxiliary game starting port H10-1, and when hitting left, The second auxiliary game starting port H10-2 is an auxiliary game starting port that is difficult (or impossible) to enter and is easy to enter when hitting to the right. Incidentally, the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1 is provided with a first auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s-1 for detecting a ball entering the starting opening, and a second auxiliary game starting. The mouth H10-2 is provided with a second auxiliary game starting mouth entrance detecting device H11s-2 for detecting the entrance into the starting mouth. In the sixth embodiment, the second main game starting opening B10 is provided at a position where it is difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball when left-handed and easy to enter when right-handed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided at a position where the player can enter the ball with either left or right hitting (for example, below the first main game starting opening A10). With such a configuration, even if the second main game starting opening electric auditors thing B11d is opened by the left hitting and the game ball entering the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1, the left side By continuing the beating, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second main game starting opening B10. Moreover, you may comprise so that only one auxiliary game starting port may be provided. In such a configuration, the position of the auxiliary game starting port may be left hitting or right hitting. In any of the above, it is configured to be provided at a position where a game ball can enter the auxiliary game starting opening, or if left-handing is executed, all winning openings (first main A structure to be able to enter the game starting port, the second main game starting port, the first big winning port, the second big winning port, the auxiliary game starting port, etc. It is desirable to configure the game board surface so that the game can proceed. Incidentally, there is no problem even if the auxiliary game starting port is provided in addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment (for example, three are provided).

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 (sixth) in FIG. First, in step 1110, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflows or passes in the case of a gate) into the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1. .. If Yes in step 1110, the process moves to step 1118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1110, in step 1114, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H enters the game ball into the second auxiliary gaming starting opening H10-2 (inflow, passing in case of gate). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1114, in step 1118, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether the holding balls are not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). To determine. If Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H determines the auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, the auxiliary game winning determination random number, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number, the auxiliary game variation mode determining random number, Etc.). Next, in step 1122, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a ball with the random number set in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with information indicating how many pieces are held. Is incremented by 1. Next, in step 1124, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H causes the auxiliary game hold occurrence command (command to the sub side, which is a command related to the hold random number generated by the auxiliary game side, and the occurrence of hold). A command related to information as to whether the starting opening that triggered the operation is the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1 or the second auxiliary game starting opening H10-2, etc.) for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1114 or step 1118, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1200).

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 1208 (sixth) to step 1211 (sixth), step 1225 (sixth), step 1230 (sixth), step 1231 (sixth), step 1233-1 (third). 6), 1233-2 (sixth) and step 1252 (sixth) to step 1256 (sixth), that is, in step 1206, if there is a reserve ball for the auxiliary game symbol, step 1208 (sixth) Then, the auxiliary game win/loss lottery means MN11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to obtain the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag), and the auxiliary game win/loss lottery. Referring to the table MN11ta-H (auxiliary game table 1), the auxiliary game win/loss lottery is executed based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game win/no random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the reserved ball. It is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game win/loss table MN11ta-H (auxiliary game table 1). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, when the auxiliary game shortening flag is on, the auxiliary game win/loss lottery result is more likely to be won than when it is off. There is. Incidentally, as illustrated in “Example of changing auxiliary game table 1”, there is no problem in changing the distribution of the random numbers of the winning and losing in the auxiliary game win/loss lottery.

Next, in step 1209 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary game table 2), and the result of the executed winning and losing lottery Based on the auxiliary game symbol random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the reserve ball, the stop symbol is determined and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H (auxiliary game table 2). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the random number distribution of the auxiliary game stop symbol is the same random number distribution regardless of whether the auxiliary game time saving flag is on or off. In the present embodiment, the auxiliary game winning/discarding random number and the auxiliary game symbol random number are configured to be acquired as different random numbers, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary gaming symbol random number is provided with information relating to winning/failing. It may be configured as follows. In such a case, it is desirable that the random number distribution of the auxiliary game stop symbol be made different depending on the game state of the auxiliary game side (in order to make the winning rate of the auxiliary game symbol different depending on the game state).

Next, in step 1210 (sixth), the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H refers to the auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3) to refer to the auxiliary game side game state ( Based on auxiliary game variation mode random number (auxiliary game side random number) based on the auxiliary game time shortening flag) and the reserved ball, a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H ( For example, 4 seconds is set when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off).

Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H (auxiliary game table 3). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off, there are five types of variable time that can be determined, while when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on. The type of variable time that can be determined is one, and there are more types of variable time when the auxiliary game shortened flag is off. Further, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is configured to be relatively short as compared with the case where it is off. It should be noted that there is no problem in changing the variation mode (variation time) of the auxiliary game symbol, but when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off, there are a plurality of types of variation modes so that the player is not aware of the stop timing of the auxiliary game symbol. (Variable time) is preferably configured (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is a symbol to be a hit, the timing of opening the second main game start port electric accessory B11d related to the hit symbol) In order to prevent aiming to shoot the game ball), if the auxiliary game time saving flag is off, there is no problem even if the player is aware of the stop timing of the auxiliary game symbol, so the auxiliary game time saving flag is off. It is preferable to configure so as to have fewer types of variation modes (variation times) than the case.

Next, in step 1211 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H commands related to the determined auxiliary game symbol information and auxiliary game side game state information (command to the sub side, auxiliary game variation start Command (etc.) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1220.

Further, in step 1224, when the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached, in step 1225 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H relates to the fact that the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed. A command (command to the sub side) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control section side (transmitted to the sub main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and step 1226 Move to. In step 1228, after turning off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag, in step 1230 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game stop symbol is a winning symbol (LS in this example). If Yes in step 1230 (sixth), in step 1231 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the auxiliary game stop symbol is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol (L in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1231 (sixth), in step 1233-1 (sixth), the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B is a game state and a stop symbol on the auxiliary game side (this example). Then, based on L), the opening mode (for example, 0.5 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed → 5 seconds open → closed) is determined, and the second main game starting port electric auditors release timer MP22t-B is electrically driven. A predetermined time related to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the accessory is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1231 (sixth), at step 1233-1 (sixth), the second main game start opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B is in the auxiliary game side game state and stops. Based on the symbol (in this example, S), the opening/closing mode (for example, 0.5 seconds open→closed) is determined, and the opening time of the electric accessory is set to the second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B ( A predetermined time relating to (opening/closing time) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

Here, FIG. 77 is an example of the electric accessory opening time determination table MN81ta (auxiliary game table 3-1 and auxiliary game table 3-2). As shown in the figure, in the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d differs depending on the ON/OFF of the auxiliary game shortening flag and the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side. Has been done. In addition, in the present embodiment, one opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is the longest when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "L" and the auxiliary game short time flag is off (in this example, 5 seconds). The opening/closing mode in which the one main opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is the longest is referred to as a special opening/closing mode.

Further, in step 1236, after opening the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d, in step 1248 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H, the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H With reference to the opened/closed mode, the opened/closed mode is a special open/close mode ("0.5 second open→0.5 second closed→5 second open→closed", the auxiliary game stop symbol is "L", and the auxiliary It is determined whether or not it is an opening/closing mode that can be set when the short game time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1248 (sixth), in step 1252 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special opening/closing mode start command (a command to the sub side, the opening time related to the special opening/closing mode). Is set to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and Moving to 1242. Even if No in step 1202 or step 1248 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1242.

Further, in step 1246, after turning off the electric auditors open flag, in step 1254 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, The set opening/closing mode is a special opening/closing mode (“0.5 second opening→0.5 second closing→5 second opening→closing”, the auxiliary game stop symbol is “L”, and the auxiliary game shortened flag is set. It is an open/close mode that can be set when is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 1254 (sixth), in step 1256 (sixth), the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is a special opening/closing mode end command (command to the sub side, opening time related to the special opening/closing mode). Is set to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and The process moves to the process (process of step 1300). Even if No in step 1230 (sixth) or step 1254 (sixth), the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1300).

Next, FIG. 78 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3100 (sixth), step 3400 (sixth), step 3500 (sixth), step 3600 (sixth) and step 3700 (sixth), that is, step 3100. At (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control section) SM executes a hold information management/hold display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2200. Further, after the decorative symbol display control process of step 2300 is executed, in step 3400 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the sub game display content determination process for the auxiliary game, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a sub game display control process for an auxiliary game, which will be described later. Next, in step 3600 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a holding information pre-determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2400. In addition, after executing the special game-related display control process in step 2400, in step 3700 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the sub game display area size change control process described later, The procedure moves to step 2700.

Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the pending information management/pending display control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a new suspension generation command for the auxiliary game side has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 increments the auxiliary game holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b by one. Next, at step 3106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 draws the information about the starting opening and the auxiliary game side random number received from the main control board M, which is the trigger for the occurrence of the hold on the auxiliary game side. It is temporarily stored in the suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 3116. In the sixth embodiment, the random number value is directly transmitted from the main control board M side, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, to transmit the symbol information (preliminarily derived before the symbol variation) derived from the main control board M side based on the random number value (predetermined hit result, stop symbol, variation mode, etc.) You may comprise. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3108, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new symbol information from the main control board M side to the auxiliary game side (in other words, If so, it is determined whether or not (the effect of starting symbol fluctuation) is received. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game holding counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the auxiliary game side random number related to the symbol variation from the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining reservation information (hold digestion). To do. Then, in step 3114, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the auxiliary game sub-game content determination permission flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3116. If the answer is No in step 3108, the process moves to step 3116. In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured not to display the auxiliary game holding number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the auxiliary game holding number may be displayed.

Next, in step 3116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new suspension generation command for the first main game side has been received from the main control board M side. To determine. If Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 increments the first main game drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b by one. Next, in step 3120, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 displays the winning order and the first main game side random number related to the suspension information of the first main game side received from the main control board M side in the drawing suspension information. It is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 3130. Then, in step 3130, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the same number of holding displays as the first main game drawing holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b (in the first holding display section SG12). It is a lamp image to be displayed, which may be hereinafter referred to as a first main-game drawing suspension lamp), and proceeds to step 3132. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in step 3122, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new symbol information from the main control board M side to the first main game side. It is determined whether or not (in other words, the effect of starting the symbol variation) is received. If Yes in step 3122, in step 3124, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the first main game drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3126, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the first main game side random number relating to the symbol variation from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining suspension information (holding). Digest. Then, in step 3128, the effect display control means SM20 turns on the main game supplementary auxiliary game content determination permission flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3130. If the answer is No in step 3122, the process moves to step 3132.

Next, in step 3132, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not a new suspension generation command for the second main game side has been received from the main control board M side. To determine. If Yes in step 3132, in step 3134, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 increments the second main game drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b by one. Next, at step 3136, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 displays the winning order and the second main game side random number relating to the suspension information on the second main game side received from the main control board M side, and the drawing suspension information. It is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 3146. Then, in step 3146, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 displays the same number of holding displays as the second main game drawing holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b (in the second holding display section SG13). It is a lamp image to be displayed, and hereinafter, it may be referred to as a second main game drawing reservation lamp), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3132, in step 3138, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and new symbol information from the main control board M side to the second main game side. It is determined whether or not (in other words, the effect of starting the symbol variation) is received. If Yes in step 3138, in step 3140, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts 1 from the second main game drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3142, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the second main game side random number relating to the symbol variation from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining suspension information (holding). Digest. Then, in step 3144, effect display control means SM20 turns on the main game supplementary auxiliary game content determination permission flag in notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3146. If No in step 3138, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game auxiliary game display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in the sixth embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the auxiliary game symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as roulette effect) is intended to be executable, as described later, The variable display result is configured not only to notify or suggest the game result on the auxiliary game side, but also to notify or suggest the game result on the main game side. First, in step 3402, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination permission flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns off the auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination permission flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3406, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the auxiliary game side game state information transmitted from the main control board M side in step 1211. To confirm. Next, in step 3408, the roulette effect contents determination means SM27n determines whether or not the game state of the auxiliary game side is the non-time shortened game based on the confirmation result of the game state. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3450 (sixth), the roulette effect content determination means SM27n executes an auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination process described later. That is, the roulette effect, which will be described later, is configured to be executed only during the non-time reduction game state.

Next, in step 3420, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether to turn on/off the roulette effect execution permission flag (auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination processing described later) in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Flag) is on. If Yes in step 3420, in step 3422, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns off the roulette effect execution permission flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3424, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the final result of the roulette effect (determined in the auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination processing described later, in this example, "miss", "auxiliary game winning" and "One of the "main game win" is determined), based on the symbol information from the main control board M side (especially, the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol), refer to the roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta, The effect mode and execution timing of the roulette effect are determined and temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

Here, FIG. 81 (sub game table 2-1) is an example of a roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta (particularly, a roulette effect production mode and execution timing determination table). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, based on the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol and the final result of the roulette effect, the effect mode and execution timing of the roulette effect are determined by lottery. .. For example, when the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol is "10.0 seconds" and the final result of the roulette effect is "miss", "roulette effect 1" and "roulette effect 2" are the effect modes of the roulette effect. Of the selection probabilities "500/512" and "12/512", respectively, and the execution timing of the roulette effect is determined to be "5.0 seconds". Then, as will be described later, the roulette array pattern displayed in the roulette effect is determined based on the effect mode of the roulette effect, and when the execution timing of the roulette effect is reached, the display of the determined roulette array pattern is triggered. Will be started. The presentation mode, execution timing, and selection probability of the roulette effect are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 3426, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the roulette effect based on the determined roulette effect effect (temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). The roulette array pattern displayed in the roulette effect is determined with reference to the effect content determination lottery table SM27ta, and is temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

Here, FIG. 81 (sub game table 2-2) is an example of a roulette effect content determination lottery table SM27ta (in particular, a roulette array pattern determination table). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, the roulette array pattern displayed in the roulette effect is uniquely determined based on the effect mode of the roulette effect. For example, when the production mode of the roulette production is "roulette production 1", any of "--", "electrical accessory open", and "special winning opening" is displayed in each of the roulette pieces 0-9. An array pattern (roulette array pattern 1) in which the heads are arranged is displayed. Here, "electrical accessory opening" means the display content for notifying that the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is opened, while "large winning opening opening" means the first This means that the display content is for notifying that the special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20 is opened (shifts to the special game). That is, as will be described later, the content that can be notified as the final result of the roulette effect is configured to include not only the outcome of the auxiliary game side but also the outcome of the main game side. Note that the display content provided in each frame is not limited to this, and may be display content that suggests the win/fail result of the auxiliary game side and the win/fail result of the main game side (for example, roulette). As shown in the array pattern 2, when the frame of "open!?" is stopped and displayed, a display notifying that the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d may be opened. If the content is displayed, or if the frame of "chance!" is stopped and displayed, the content is displayed to inform that there is a possibility of shifting to a special game, or the frame of "open!!" When is displayed as a stop, the display content is for notifying that the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d will be confirmed to be opened, or the display of "Geki Atsu!!" is stopped and displayed. If it is done, the display content for notifying that the shift to the special game will be confirmed is displayed, etc.). Incidentally, the roulette such as the roulette array pattern 4 in which the winning of the auxiliary game side is definite is selected only when the auxiliary game side is winning, but can be selected when the auxiliary game side is winning. It is desirable to configure the roulette array pattern so that it is the most difficult to be selected (or relatively hard to be selected). In addition, when the auxiliary game side is a win, as a content that can be informed as the final result of the roulette effect, "open!?", "open!!" It is desirable to configure so that the stop display is likely to occur and that the "-" and other auxiliary game-side non-winning pieces are relatively unlikely to be stopped and displayed, such as "open!?" and "open!!" It may be configured such that only the frames suggesting the winning of the side are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the main game side is a win, as a content that can be informed as the final result of the roulette effect, a piece such as “Geki Atsu!!”, “Chance!” or the like suggesting the win of the main game side is relatively. It is desirable to configure so that the stop display is likely to occur and relatively difficult to display the stop such as "-" indicating the non-winning of the main game side. Also, when the auxiliary game side is winning, the stop display ratio of the frames suggesting the winning of the auxiliary game side: the stop display ratio of the frames suggesting non-winning of the auxiliary game side = 9:1, and the main game side If it is a win, the auxiliary game side is a win, such as "stop display ratio of frames suggesting a win on the main game side: stop display ratio of frames suggesting a non-win on the main game side = 1:1". In this case, it is desirable to configure the stop display ratio of the frames suggesting the winning of the main game side when the main game side is winning to be lower than the stop display ratio of the frames suggesting the winning of the auxiliary game side. .. Further, in the sixth embodiment, in the non-time shortening game state (or in the state where the auxiliary game time shortening flag is off), when the opening/closing mode of the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d is the special opening/closing mode On the other hand (when the auxiliary game side is won), the roulette effect is always executed, while when the main game side is a big hit, the roulette effect is executed only partially. Although the execution frequency of the roulette effect may be changed, for example, the roulette effect related to the winning on the auxiliary game side is long time such as when the main game side is winning and super reach etc. The variable time (for example, a variable time of 60 seconds or more) is not selected, and the roulette effect related to the winning of the main game side is executed at 5% of the case when the main game side is winning. It is desirable that the ratio at which the roulette effect for the winning on the auxiliary game side is executed is higher than the ratio at which the roulette effect for the winning on the main game side is executed.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 3428, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines the roulette frame number which is the stop display position for notifying the final result of the roulette effect and the roulette array pattern, based on the roulette effect. Determined (for example, in the case of final result = "miss", one of the tops with "--" is arranged, and in the case of final result = "auxiliary game win", "electrical accessory release" is arranged. If any of the tops, and if the final result = "main game win", then determine which of the tops "Prize winning opening" is arranged), and temporarily store in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. To do. Next, in step 3430, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n turns on the auxiliary game auxiliary game content determining flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {process of step 3500 (sixth)}. Move to. Even if No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3420, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3500 (sixth)}.

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a sub-game content determination process for an auxiliary game according to the subroutine of step 3450 (sixth) in FIG. 80 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3452, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and confirms the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol transmitted from the main control board M side in step 1211. Next, in step 3454, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “L” which is a hit based on the confirmation result, in other words, the stop display of the auxiliary game symbol. After that, it is determined whether or not the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is to execute the special opening/closing mode. In the case of Yes in step 3454, in step 3456, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is a change based on a ball entering the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 3456, the final result of the roulette effect is determined as "auxiliary game winning" in step 3458. Then, in step 3488, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n turns on the roulette effect execution permission flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {step 3420 (sixth process)}. Move to.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3454, in step 3462, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the final result of the roulette effect as “miss”. Here, the decision is a tentative decision, and as will be described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the final result of the roulette effect is replaced from “miss” to “main game winning”. In the sixth embodiment, as the predetermined condition, "executability determination processing based on the number of main game symbols to be held", "executability determination processing based on the variation status of the main game symbol", "sub-game for main game" There are four examples of "executability determination processing 1 based on execution status of" and "executability determination processing 2 based on execution status of main game secondary game".

(Execution availability determination processing based on the number of held main game symbols)
Next, in Step 3464, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines whether or not the roulette effect can be executed with a predetermined lottery probability, based on the first main-apparatus drawing holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. To execute. Here, as an example of the executability lottery, in the case where the first main gaming diagram suspension counter value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), there is a high probability of being higher than in the case of the predetermined number or more. It can be mentioned that it is configured to win. Next, in step 3466, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the execution availability lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3466, the process proceeds to step 3468, while if No in step 3466, the process proceeds to the next process {process 3420 (sixth) process}.

(Execution availability determination processing based on the fluctuation status of the main game symbol)
Next, in Step 3468, the roulette effect content determining means SM27n determines whether or not the flag for changing the drawing in the flag area of the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is ON, in other words, the main game symbol. It is determined whether or not the decorative design, which is the corresponding sub game, is being variably displayed. If No in step 3468, the process proceeds to step 3488. If Yes in step 3468, in step 3470, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the timer value Ts of the figure variation time management timer SM21t and the main control. Confirm the variation time value Th of the auxiliary game symbol transmitted from the board M side, calculate "Ts+Th", and temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the final temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol. (In this example, it is compared with the time value Te that is the temporary stop timing in the middle row). Next, in step 3472, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the condition of “Ts+Th<Te” is satisfied based on the comparison result. If Yes in step 3472, the process moves to step 3474. If No in step 3472, the process moves to the next process (process of step 3420). Here, a supplementary explanation of this processing will be made. In the case where the condition of “Ts+Th<Te” is satisfied, before the result of the game on the main game side (stop symbol content of the main game symbol) is definitely notified. The situation is such that the final result of the roulette effect is notified. That is, as a final result of the roulette effect, when notifying the game result of the main game side that is being executed concurrently, it is guaranteed that the game result of the main game side cannot be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and under a situation in which the game result on the main game side may change, in other words, the roulette effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations of the main game symbol. In that case, the final result of the roulette effect is the game result of the main game side that is being executed at the end of the roulette effect (the game result related to the hold of the main game side that has not been digested when the content of the roulette effect is determined. ) May be the content determined in advance. Further, as in this example, when the main control board M side is configured to be able to select a plurality of types of fluctuation times as the fluctuation time value of the auxiliary game symbol, "Ts+Th<Te" on the main control board M side. In order to satisfy the condition that becomes, in other words, it can be adjusted by forcibly selecting the variation time that is shorter as the variation time value of the auxiliary game symbol so that it falls within the variation remaining time of the main game symbol. It may be configured as follows.

(Executability decision processing 1 based on the execution status of the sub game for the main game)
Next, in step 3474, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the display timing of the notice effect, and the notice effect type to be displayed, Based on the timer value Ts of the diagram variation time management timer SM21t, the notice effect display period relating to the particular notice effect (in this example, notice effect type 2) is confirmed. For example, when the timer value Ts is 5 seconds (after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern) and the display of the notice effect type 2 has been determined, 5 seconds to 10 seconds later is the notice effect type 2. This is the notice production display period. Next, in step 3476, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the notice effect display period overlaps with the roulette effect execution period based on the confirmation result. If Yes in step 3476, the process moves to step 3478, while if No in step 3476, the process moves to the next process (process of step 3420). Here, as a supplementary explanation of this process, the specific notice effect means an effect in which whether or not to display the notice effect is determined depending on whether or not the sub input button is operable, and the operation of the sub input button during the notice effect display period. This is a presentation in which a message prompting is displayed. That is, in this way, when the effect requiring the operation action by the player is being executed, the execution of the roulette effect is canceled.

(Execution availability determination processing 2 based on the execution status of the secondary game for the main game)
Next, in step 3478, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines a predetermined value based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol and the timer value Ts of the figure variation time management timer SM21t which are temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. The roulette effect feasibility lottery is executed with the lottery probability. Here, as an example of the execution feasibility lottery, when the execution period of the roulette effect falls within the period before the reach occurs before the variation of the decorative design, the execution period of the roulette effect within the period before the reach occurs It is possible to cite a configuration in which there is a high probability of winning as compared with the case where is not set. Next, in step 3480, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not the execution availability lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3480, the process proceeds to step 3482, while if No in step 3480, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3420). Here, supplementary explanation of this process, the effect executed after the reach is an effect to be watched by the player, and in particular, the result of the game on the main game side will be any result during the predetermined period after the reach. There is a case where it is expressed by a highly interesting production. That is, in this way, when a highly entertaining effect is being executed, the execution of the roulette effect is easily canceled.

After the roulette effect execution feasibility determination process as described above is performed, in step 3482, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped is displayed. Check the stop design (or the stop design of the decorative design). Next, in step 3484, the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines whether or not it is a stop display schedule with a big hit symbol based on the confirmation result. If No in step 3484, the process proceeds to step 3488. If Yes in step 3484, in step 3486 the roulette effect content determination means SM27n determines the final result of the roulette effect from “miss” to “main game winning”. And shifts to step 3488. In addition, in the case of No in step 3456, the process shifts to the next process {process of step 3420 (sixth)}.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game auxiliary game display control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game auxiliary game content determination flag is ON. If Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns off the auxiliary game sub-game content determination flag in the preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3506, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns on the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3508, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 starts the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t, and proceeds to step 3510. Note that if No in step 3502, the process moves to step 3510.

Next, in step 3510, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the roulette effect execution monitoring flag is on. If Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 executes the roulette effect in which the timer value of the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t is temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether the timing has been reached. If Yes in step 3512, in step 3514, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 displays a display area different from the "display area 1" in the main game decorative symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. Therefore, "display area 2" which is a display area for a predetermined number of frames (3 frames) in the roulette array pattern is displayed. Next, in step 3516, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 uses the roulette array pattern temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b to determine each frame (in this example, the roulette frame number 0 to 0). 9) are sequentially displayed in the "display area 2" at a low speed (for example, the display is changed when the number of seconds passed per frame=0.3 frames). Next, in step 3518, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not the roulette array pattern has completed one round by the variable display. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines each frame (in this example, roulette wheel) based on the roulette array pattern temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Each of the frame numbers 0 to 9) is sequentially displayed at high speed in the "display area 2" (for example, the number of passing seconds of one frame=0.1 frame is displayed), and the process proceeds to step 3530. If No at step 3512 or step 3518, the process moves to step 3530.

Next, in step 3530, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3530, in step 3532, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 has reached the timing at which the final result of the roulette effect can be informed, in other words, the second main game starting opening electric auditorium product B11d. Is released for a long period of time (for example, in the roulette effect during variable display, the roulette frame number to be the stop display position and the frame numbers before and after it are shake-variably displayed in the “display area 2”). Next, in step 3534, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the notification. If Yes in step 3534, in step 3536, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 stops the roulette effect execution monitoring timer SM27t and resets (zero-clears) the timer value. Next, in step 3538, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 confirms and displays the roulette piece number, which is the stop display position in the roulette effect, in the “display area 2” (not shown in this example, The result of the roulette effect may be notified before the auxiliary game symbol variation ends). Next, in step 3540, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 turns off the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 3541, the roulette effect display control means SM27-1 determines whether or not the final result of the executed roulette effect is “auxiliary game winning” (the final result of the roulette effect is step 3458 or step). 3462). If Yes in step 3541, in step 3542 the opening effect display control means SM29 turns on the opening effect execution permission flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 3544. Even if No in step 3510, step 3530, step 3534, or step 3541, the process moves to step 3544.

Next, in step 3544, the opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the opening effect execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 3544, in step 3546, the opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new special opening/closing mode start command is received from the main side. .. In the case of Yes in step 3546, in step 3548, the opening effect display control means SM29 executes the opening effect (effect indicating that the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d is open in the special opening/closing mode). A command to be performed is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to step 3550. On the other hand, if No in step 3546, the process moves to step 3550.

Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, when the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is opened in the special opening/closing mode based on the entry of the game ball into the second auxiliary game starting port H10-2, it is opened. Although the middle effect is configured not to be executed, when the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the special opening/closing mode at the time of returning from the power interruption (that is, opened in the special opening/closing mode). When the power is turned off during the operation and then returned), even if the opening is due to the entry of the game ball into the second auxiliary game starting opening H10-2, the performance during the opening can be executed. You may comprise.

Next, in step 3550, the opening effect display control means SM29 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new special opening/closing mode end command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 3550, in step 3552, the opening effect display control means SM29 sets a command for ending the opening effect being executed (in the display command transmission control process of step 2700, to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Sent). Next, in step 3554, the opening effect display control means SM29 turns off the opening effect execution permission in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process {step 3600 (sixth). Processing}. Even if No in step 3544 or step 3550, the process moves to the next process {process of step 3600 (sixth)}.

In the sixth embodiment, the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516 and the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3520 are configured to be the same, but the invention is not limited to this. In that case, for example, when "roulette effect 3" is executed as the effect mode of the roulette effect, in other words, when the final result of the roulette effect is clear by the roulette array pattern, As the roulette array pattern displayed in step 3516, an array pattern (eg, roulette array pattern 1 or 2) in which the final result of the roulette effect is not clear is displayed, and in step 3520, the final result of the roulette effect. Can be exemplified as a roulette array pattern in which is clear. Further, in this example, the timing at which the final result of the roulette effect can be informed is the predetermined period of time after the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed, but the invention is not limited to this and the auxiliary game symbol is stopped and displayed. The final result of the roulette effect may be notified before the time.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the roulette effect is configured to be executed in conjunction with the auxiliary game symbol variation, but this is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, roulette according to the main game symbol variation. Performing production, executing roulette production at appropriate timing according to both main game symbol variation and auxiliary game symbol variation, or not interlocking with any variation, so that roulette production can be executed at appropriate timing May be configured (By adjusting the execution time of the roulette effect appropriately, even when the roulette effect is started without interlocking with the fluctuation of the design, there is a discrepancy between the big hit and the electric tulong opening and the result of the roulette effect. It is possible not to let).

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in the special opening/closing mode, the opening is started and at the same time, the performance during opening can be executed. Without being limited to this, for example, when opening the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in an opening pattern (special opening/closing mode) of 0.5 second opening→0.5 second closing→5.0 second opening The opening effect may be started after the 0.5 second opening is completed (for example, before the 5.0 second opening is started).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the pending information preliminary determination process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3601, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the non-time-reduced game state. If Yes in step 3601, in step 3602, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 confirms the auxiliary game design drawing hold counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 3604, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether or not the auxiliary game drawing hold counter value has increased based on the confirmation result, in other words, the auxiliary game side hold number has increased. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3604, in step 3610, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 predetermines the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol based on the increased auxiliary game side random number relating to the suspension of the auxiliary game side.

Next, in step 3612, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the increased hold is entered (or passed) into the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-2. It is determined whether or not the hold has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3612, in step 3614, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “L” based on the preliminary determination result. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 opens and closes the light emission effect (the second main game starting port electric auditorium item B11d) based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 2/3). Execution feasibility lottery of the effect of notifying that there is a possibility that the mode is a special mode is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3620. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3618, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2, based on a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 1/30), the light emission effect (second main game start port electric auditorium product B11d). Execution possibility lottery of performance that notifies that there is a possibility that the opening/closing mode of the above will be a special mode is executed, and the process proceeds to step 3620.

Next, in step 3620, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 refers to the execution feasibility lottery result executed in step 3616 or step 3618, and determines whether or not the execution feasibility lottery is won. In the sixth embodiment, when the execution feasibility lottery executed in step 3616 is won, the opening/closing mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is a special mode triggered by the increased suspension. On the other hand, if the execution propriety lottery executed in step 3618 is won, the opening/closing mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d does not become a special mode triggered by the increased suspension. Configured as planned. If Yes in step 3620, in step 3622, the light emission effect display control means SM24-2 issues a command to execute an effect (the above-described light emission effect) in which the auxiliary game decorative symbol in the auxiliary game decorative symbol display area SG11-H emits light. It is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2700), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3700). Even if No in step 3601, step 3604, step 3612, or step 3620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, the light-emission effect can be executed only in the non-time-reduced game state, but it may be configured to execute the light-emission effect also in the time-reduced game state (for example, , If the auxiliary game symbol "L" which is a hit is scheduled to be stopped, the execution possibility lottery of the light emission effect is executed, etc.). In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as the hold-ahead read effect, it is configured to execute the effect that the auxiliary game decoration symbol emits light, but it is not limited to this, for example, the stop pattern of the auxiliary game is a specific lost symbol. When it is stopped and displayed, the display area of the roulette effect is always displayed, and the display area is made to emit light or the auxiliary game schematic drawing hold is displayed, the display mode of the auxiliary game schematic drawing hold is changed, 2 The main game starting port electric accessory B11d may be provided with a light emitting unit, and the light emitting unit may be configured to light up.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the sub game display area size change control processing according to the subroutine of step 3700 (sixth) in FIG. 78 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3702, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the roulette effect execution monitoring flag in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b is ON, in other words, the roulette effect is being executed (or. (Waiting for execution). In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704 the effect display size change control means SM28 confirms the final result relating to the roulette effect being executed (or waiting for execution). Next, in step 3706, the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the final result of the roulette effect is “auxiliary game winning” based on the confirmation result. If Yes in step 3706, in step 3708 the effect display size change control means SM28 determines whether or not the roulette effect is being executed (whether or not the roulette effect execution timing has been reached). In the case of Yes in step 3708, in step 3710, the effect display size change control means SM28 changes the display size of "display area 2" to "display area 1" in the main game decorative symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. Is displayed larger than the display size of "(display image is shown in the margin), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3800). In addition, in the case of No at step 3702, step 3706 or step 3708, at step 3712, the effect display size change control means SM28 causes the "display area 1" in the main game decorative symbol display area SG11-1 on the effect display device SG. The display size of is displayed larger than the display size of "display area 2" (the display image is shown in the margin, but "display area 2" may be deleted), and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2700). In the process of step 3706, the determination may be Yes even when the final result of the roulette effect is "miss" or "main game winning".

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, during the non-time shortening game, the second main game is the auxiliary game relating to the entry into the first auxiliary game starting opening H10-1. When the opening mouth electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in the special opening/closing mode, pre-reading effect (light emitting effect in this example), changing effect (roulette effect in this example), and opening effect can be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved by supporting the player's sense of expectation regarding the long opening that can store the second main game hold, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the auxiliary game relating to the entry into the second auxiliary game starting opening H10-2 (in the non-time shortened game state, normally, left-handed strokes are executed, so the auxiliary game occurs irregularly) Even when the game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in the special opening/closing mode, the above-mentioned effect is not executed. As a result, even if the player plays an irregular game (for example, right-handed) during the non-time-reduced game state, it is difficult to enjoy the benefit of the long opening of the second main game starting opening electric auditorium product B11d, and thus the irregular It is possible to suppress the execution of a typical game.

In this example, during the special game, during the variation based on the ball entering the second auxiliary game starting opening H10-2, the changing effect (roulette effect) and the opening effect can be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the hold prefetching effect (light emission effect) may be executed, or only the opening effect may be executed. Further, during the special game, the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d may be configured to be able to execute a special effect when it is opened long in the special opening/closing mode.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, during the non-time-reducing game, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is in the special opening/closing mode in the auxiliary game relating to the entry into the first auxiliary playing starting opening H10-1. When the game ball is inserted into the second main game starting opening B10 when it is opened for a long time, the effect during the symbol variation related to the entry is the non-time shortened game state, and the first main game. It may be a special mode that is an effect mode that is not executed during the symbol change on the side. In the case of such a configuration, (1) the variable time selection candidate that can be selected when determining the variable time on the second main game side does not depend on the number held on the second main game side, (2) The special mode effect can be executed in the non-time-reduced game state, (3) In the non-time-reduced game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side can be executed, but the second main The prefetch effect related to the game side may not be executed, or the like, and may have only one configuration (1) to (3), or may have a plurality of configurations at the same time.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the special second big winning opening C20 described above (the maximum count number of game balls can be entered even in the small hit game), and the second main game side is small. The winning probability (in this example, the normal gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, both 160/1024) is a winning ratio (probability fluctuation) that is 10 times or more than the jackpot winning probability in this regular gaming state (3/1024 in this example). The upper limit that can increase the jackpot winning probability with the function is less than 10 times), and by winning the small jackpot on the second main game side (by entering the V winning port C22), you win the actual jackpot. By configuring as follows, in the non-time shortening game state, while the game is progressing left-handed, in the auxiliary game related to the ball entering the first auxiliary game start opening H10-1, 2 Main game start opening The electric accessory B11d is opened long in the special opening/closing mode, so that a game ball can enter the second special winning opening C20 by right-handing, and the first in the non-time-reduced game state. By entering the auxiliary game starting opening H10-1, it is possible to create a novel game property such that a chance to win a real jackpot suddenly comes.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be drawn in parallel at the same time (and variable), so that a parallel lottery can be executed. Alternatively, in the case of such a configuration, the second main game side may not have a holding function (the second main game holding upper limit number may be 0). The configuration capable of executing the parallel lottery is described in detail in the seventh embodiment.

Further, as the configuration of the sixth embodiment, (1) the auxiliary game time shortening flag is turned off, and the variation time of the variation in which the result of winning or losing on the auxiliary game side is lost may be all short (for example, the variation time that can be selected). If there is only one type of "1 second", etc.), (2) When the second main game wins the small hit in the non-time reduction game state, after the big hit ends with the small hit The average value of the number of times saved and saved is smaller than the average value of the number of times saved and saved after the big hit ends when the second main game wins the small hit in the time saving game state, (3) When the second main game wins the small hit in the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state transition rate after the big hit is triggered by the small hit, the second main game in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to be lower than the time reduction game state transition rate after the big hit ends when the small hit is won on the side.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is set to have a high ball entry efficiency with respect to the launched game ball, such as the second special winning opening C20 of this example. Also, for example, the second main game starting opening B10 is arranged below the first main game starting opening A10, and almost all of the game balls shot by either left or right hitting are second main starting. It flows down near the mouth B10, and has a guide member for guiding the game ball to the second main game starting mouth B10 in the left-right direction of the second main game starting mouth B10, and the second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d. The game balls guided to the guide member during opening may be configured to enter the second main game starting opening B10 almost entirely.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as an opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, “short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) open→intermediate time (for example, 0.5 seconds) close→long” The time (for example, 4 seconds) may be released". The time value is “short time<medium time<long time”. In addition, during the closing period of the middle time, an effect may be executed that prompts the game ball to be shot toward the second main game starting opening B10 (in this example, right-handed).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, a common ball entrance that is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter are provided downstream of the common ball entrance. The first main game starting opening, and a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, an auxiliary game starting opening provided downstream of the common entrance, and a game entering the common entrance A member that changes the flow direction of the ball toward one of the first main game starting port and the auxiliary game starting port, and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common ball inlet are the first main game starting port. It has a distribution member that operates so as to be alternately distributed to the auxiliary game starting port, and the distribution member is evenly distributed to the first main game starting port and the auxiliary game starting port by the weight of the game ball. Alternatively, the distribution member may be electrically driven and may not be evenly distributed to the first main game starting port and the auxiliary game starting port.

(Seventh embodiment)
In the embodiment described so far, one first main game starting port A10 is provided, and the variation on the second main game side is prioritized over the variation on the first main game side. In this example, it is possible to create a new game nature with a configuration different from the above configuration. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the seventh embodiment is also a modified example based on the present embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the seventh embodiment.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment executes a parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be simultaneously drawn in parallel (and variable). Is configured to get. Incidentally, during the special game, the changing main game symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped. Further, the first main game starting opening is at the same position as this embodiment (the left first main game starting opening), and it is easy to enter the ball by right-handing and difficult (or not) by left-handing. It is provided at the position (the right first main game starting port).

First, FIG. 86 is a game progress flowchart in the seventh embodiment. The flow of the game shown in this game progress flowchart will be described in detail below.

<Game progression flow 1>
In the case of the "normal game" shown in the figure (the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is in a game state in which it is difficult to be in the open state, a so-called non-electric support state), the player is the left first main game. A game ball is shot aiming at the starting opening (so-called left hitting) to advance the game. Then, when the big hit lottery on the first main game side (in this example, the big hit probability=1/256), which is carried out when the first main game starting opening A10 is entered, is shown in the figure. The first main game jackpot wins", and after the fluctuation of the symbols of the first main game symbols based on the win ends (after the jackpot symbols of the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed), a predetermined maximum number of rounds ( For example, a special game for 10R) is executed. It should be noted that during the execution of the special game, a right-handed stroke is performed to advance the game.

<Game progress flow 2>
When the special game executed in the above <Game progress flow 1> ends, "time saving" shown in the figure (a game state in which the second main game start port electric auditors product B11d is likely to be in an open state, so-called Since the state shifts to the electric power support state=time saving state), the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d (so-called right hitting) to advance the game, It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the second main game starting opening B10 (with the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 as a trigger, the winning/discarding lottery and the symbol fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol on the second main gaming side. Is done). Further, in the seventh embodiment, two first main game starting ports are provided, the left first main game starting port is easy to enter by hitting left, and the right first main game starting port is right. Since it is easy to enter the ball by hitting, during execution of the special game related to the first main game, a game ball enters the right first main game starting opening, so at the end of the special game, the first main game is held This means that the upper limit number (for example, 4) has occurred.

<Game progress flow 3>
The "time saving" shown in the figure is configured to continue until the first main game symbol changes 10 times or the second main game symbol changes 100 times. Here, in the seventh embodiment, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be variable at the same time (so-called parallel lottery is configured to be executable), and in "time saving" , The fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the ball entering the right first main game starting opening, and the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the ball entering the second main game starting opening B10 are executed at the same time. Becomes In addition, in the winning/non-winning lottery related to the second main game side, if the small hit is won at 1/10 and the small hit is won, the big hit is caused due to the ball entering the V winning opening C22 during the small hit. It will be executed, and it will shift to the time saving game state again and the number of times saved will be reset (even if you win the big hit, it will shift to the time saving game state again and the number of times saved will be reset) In "Middle", since the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is also executed, when the first main game symbol fluctuates 10 times, "time saving medium" shown in the figure will end. . Therefore, in the "time saving", how many times in succession can be achieved to win the big hit or the small hit on the second main game side until the first main game symbol fluctuates 10 times. ing. Incidentally, in "time saving", the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol is 5 seconds, the average value of the variation time of the second main game symbol is 5 seconds. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the average value of the game balls that can be acquired in "time saving" is the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol of "time saving" and the second main game of "time saving". It is configured to be determined by the average value of the variation time of the symbols, the number of times of shortening of the first main game symbol, and the small hit probability on the second main game side. In addition, if the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol of "time saving", the number of time reductions of the first main game symbol, and the small hit probability of the second main game side are large (high), The average value of the game balls that can be acquired in "time saving" becomes large, and the average value of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in "time saving" becomes large, the average value of the game balls that can be acquired in "time saving" It is configured to be smaller. Incidentally, in "time saving", a long time (for example, 50 seconds) may be selected as a fluctuation time of the first main game symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to execute a special effect such as an effect that informs the player that the profit is high during the long time fluctuation. Incidentally, in the "time saving" shown in the figure, when the first main game has finished changing 10 times (the change for the number of hours saving has ended), shift to the "normal game" shown in the figure. Becomes

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to perform parallel lottery, and to configure the time-saving game state to continue until the first main game symbol changes a predetermined number of times. Therefore, winning the big hit or the small hit on the second main game side before the first main game symbol changes a predetermined number of times, it is possible to create a novel game property of how many times it can be consecutively achieved. Becomes

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it may be configured such that it is difficult for the player to determine the variation time of the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state. In such a configuration, for example, the time depending on the elapsed time may be set. You may execute the effect that makes it look like the shortened game state is finished (make it difficult to understand the stop timing of the first main game symbol, etc.), or the time shortened game state is finished when the remaining time runs out. It is also possible to execute an effect as if to be performed, and to execute an effect such that the remaining time increases at an arbitrary timing in the time reduction game state.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state triggered by the small hit symbol, when a certain small hit symbol is stopped, the variation time of the first main game symbol after the stop timing. May be relatively long.

Note that the gaming machine according to this example always performs right-handing (does not switch to left-handing) in a high-profit state, so the firing handle D44 has a right-handing-only button (a game ball while pressing the button). May be provided regardless of the twisting condition of the firing handle D44).

In the gaming machine according to the present example, a time saving limiter (a continuous winning upper limit number of special games in the time shortening game state is set, and after the special game execution that has reached the number of times is finished, the game becomes a non-time shortening game state. ) Is provided, and in a non-time-reduced game state, when a small hit is won due to a variation related to the second main game hold, as a playability such that the execution of the special game three or more times is almost promised at the subsequent timing. Good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C22 during the execution of the small hit game which is won during the time shortening game state, the V winning detection effect is not executed, and It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, an unfortunate atmosphere effect) different from the V winning detection effect. In addition, during execution of the small hitting game which is won during the time shortening game state, when the game ball enters the first large opening of the second big winning opening C20 (does not enter the V winning opening C22), the first V The winning detection effect may be executed, and the second V winning detection effect may be executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 in the subsequent opening of the second big winning opening C20. The first V winning detection effect and the second V winning detection effect are configured such that the second winning detection effect has higher visibility (is conspicuous).

In this example (particularly in this embodiment), the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced gaming state is a period advantageous to the player (a section in which the payout can continuously increase). From the start of the execution of the special game related to, after that, after the special game is finished, it shifts to the non-time reduction game state, and there is a series of periods until the second main game hold does not exist, so this series of periods In order to output to the hall computer HC that the game continues, first, a predetermined external signal (so-called external) from the start timing of the special game relating to the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state. Signal output from one terminal on the terminal board) is turned on (and kept on after that), after that, after the special game ends, it shifts to the non-time shortened game state, and the second main game hold does not exist. It is preferable that the predetermined external signal be turned off at the timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time-reducing game state is configured to end at the time when the counter value of the hour/hour counter MP52c becomes 0, but the time-reducing game state is not limited to this. If you win a small hit in the variation (variation of the main game symbol of the 100th time since the end of the previous special game), the time reduction game state until the end of the small hit game (or the discharge standby time for the small hit game) May be configured not to end. With such a configuration, if the small hit is won at the final change and the player enters the V winning opening C22 during the subsequent small hit game, the time for the special game generated based on the entered ball is shortened. It can be handled as a special game that has occurred under a game state.

It should be noted that the description relating to the features of the various inventions described in the present invention is not limited to the embodiment or the modification example related to the description place relating to the feature, and is applied to any of the described embodiments and modification examples. There is no problem.

In this example, the opening mode of the second big winning opening C20 is set to the V winning opening C22 during the small hitting game related to the first main game side rather than during the small hitting game related to the second main game side. It may be configured to make it difficult to enter. In addition, all the first main game small hitting designs related to the small hitting game may be configured such that it is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hitting game related to the second main playing side. However, even if the small hit game related to some of the first main game small hit symbols is configured to be more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side. Good. In addition, when the small hit game related to a part of the first main game small hit symbols is configured to be more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side, The selection rate of the small hit symbol at the time of the small hit on the first main game side is "the first main game small hit that is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side. Symbol selection ratio> It is more difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 than during the small hit game related to the second main game side. The first main game small hit pattern excluding the first main game small hit symbol (second main The selection rate of the first main game small hit pattern (which is as easy to enter the V winning opening C22 as that during the small hitting game related to the game side), that is, "the difficulty of entering the V winning opening C22 1 main game small hit symbol selection rate>V main winning small hit symbol selection rate that is easy to enter the V winning opening C22" may be configured.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiment is added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (1),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) into which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information,
It is provided with a second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until it reaches a predetermined number, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold. B21g), when the second identification information is variably displayed, it is configured such that after the variably displayed, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and it is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20), the executed variable winning opening opening game is executed. Based on the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22) is configured to be substantially deterministic,
Under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20), the second special game is newly executed while the specific game state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be made until the predetermined number is reached, while continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning port (for example, the second big winning port C20) continues. Even under the circumstances, during the period when the normal gaming state is maintained, the new second suspension is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
When the second special game is executed, regardless of whether it was the normal game state or the specific game state before the execution of the second special game, the specific game state and the normal game are executed after the execution of the second special game. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that which of the states is to be distributed.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (2),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) into which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information,
It is provided with a second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
According to the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to variably display the first identification information and then stop the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
According to the content determined based on the second random number, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop the second identification information. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
When the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variably displayed. It is configured to be substantially deterministic, and the variable winning a prize opening game is performed under the situation where the continuous shooting of the game balls toward the variable winning a prize port (for example, the second special winning a prize port C20) is continued. When executed, it is configured such that the entrance to the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22) based on the executed variable winning opening opening game is substantially deterministic,
When the second identification information variation unit from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is the normal gaming state when the second identification information variation unit is performed once in the specific gaming state On the other hand, when the first identification information variation unit from the variation display start to the stop display of the first identification information is the first identification information variation unit in the specific game state, Is also a pachinko game machine characterized in that the specific game state is maintained thereafter.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (3),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) into which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information,
It is provided with a second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until it reaches a predetermined number, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold. B21g), when the second identification information is variably displayed, it is configured such that after the variably displayed, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and it is variable. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20), the executed variable winning opening opening game is executed. Based on the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22) is configured to be substantially deterministic,
Variation of the second identification information during the period in which the specific game state is maintained The total display period relating to the display period is the first total period, and variation in the second identification information during the period in which the specific game state is maintained It is configured so that at least the case where the total display period regarding the display period is the second total period which is longer than the first total period,
The second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening) within the first total period under the condition that the game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20). The second within the second total period under the situation where the continuous discharge of the game balls toward the variable winning a prize hole (for example, the second special winning a prize hole C20) is continued, rather than the expected number of balls to B10). It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that the expected number of balls entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) is larger.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (4),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A first variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a second starting port (for example, A game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) A first variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is difficult to enter as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C22) into which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information,
It is provided with a second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
A second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the first variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), the first variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric for the normal game state and the normal game state) The accessory B11d) has a specific game state in which it is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a game state transition control means for controlling the special game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is finished). With specific game control means MP50),
A second variable member (for example, a second type non-electric accessory B12) that is displaceable between an open state and a closed state,
A displacement trigger region (for example, a second main game start) that is a region through which a game ball can pass and serves as a trigger for displacing the second variable member (for example, the second type non-electric accessory B12) from the closed state to the open state. Further has a mouth B10),
During the period when the normal game state is maintained, while the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass in the displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game starting opening B10), while the specific game state is maintained In, in the displacement trigger area (for example, the second main game starting opening B10), the game ball is configured to pass or easily pass,
When the game ball enters the second variable member (for example, the second type non-electric accessory B12) that is in the open state, the second random number is configured to be acquired. It is a game machine.
The "trigger" for displacing from the closed state to the open state is (1) passing through the area (for example, entering the electric accessory without entering the second random number). The non-electric accessory A (for example, the one corresponding to the above-mentioned "first variable member configured as a non-electric accessory") is opened, and the non-electric accessory A is triggered to enter the non-electric accessory. The accessory B (for example, one corresponding to the above-mentioned "second variable member" configured as a non-electrical accessory) is opened (indirect trigger 1), and (2) area passage (for example, configured as an electrical accessory) is performed. In addition, a non-electrical accessory A (for example, a ball corresponding to the above-mentioned “first variable member”) is a ball that enters a non-electrical accessory and does not acquire a second random number. Sphere) is opened, and when the ball enters the non-electric accessory A, the non-electric accessory B (for example, the one corresponding to the “second variable member” configured as the non-electric accessory) is opened. Open (indirect trigger 2), (3) pass through the area (for example, the ball enters the electric accessory and does not acquire the second random number, or is configured as the electric accessory. In either case, the non-electrical accessory B (for example, the "second variable member" configured as a non-electrical accessory) is opened by entering the "first variable member" (direct trigger). It may be.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (5),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects (for example, effect display device SG),
And a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50),
It is provided with a game information transmitting unit (for example, game information transmission control unit MT) for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached in advance, and according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device). When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured such that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific aspect after the variably displayed, and the variability is set. When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous discharge of the game balls toward the winning a prize mouth (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) is executed, the executed variable winning a prize mouth opening game is executed. Based on the specific area (for example, V winning hole entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially deterministic,
Under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20), the second special game is newly executed while the specific game state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can be made until the predetermined number is reached, while continuous launch of game balls toward the variable winning port (for example, the second big winning port C20) continues. Even under the circumstances, during the period when the normal gaming state is maintained, the new second suspension is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
During the execution of a certain second special game, a first effect that gives a notice of whether the game state is a specific game state or a normal game state after the execution of the certain second special game is executed, and then the certain second special game is executed. When a further second special game is executed due to satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information relating to the second hold remaining during the execution of, the further second special game is executed. During the execution of the game, it is possible to execute the second effect that gives a notice of whether the game state will be the specific game state or the normal game state after the execution of the further second special game, and the effect display content of the first effect. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the production display content of the second production is configured to be production display content forming a series of stories.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (6),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
According to the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to variably display the first identification information and then stop the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
According to the content determined based on the second random number, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop the second identification information. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
A unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific game state, and the one unit is predetermined. When played a number of times, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is variable when the specific game state is set after the execution of the first special game and/or the second special game. .

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (7),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and under the condition that the game balls are continuously fired toward the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d). In the normal game state, when the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is in the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is in the open state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so as to be able to take a special open state in which a plurality of game balls can enter.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (8),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached in advance, and according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device). When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured such that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific aspect after the variably displayed, and the variability is set. When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous discharge of the game balls toward the winning a prize mouth (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) is executed, the executed variable winning a prize mouth opening game is executed. Based on the specific area (for example, V winning hole entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially deterministic,
The variation display time of the second identification information when the second hold is less than the specific number is at least one of the first variation display time and the second variation display time longer than the first variation display time. On the other hand, the variable display time of the second identification information when the second hold is more than the specific number is configured to take a variable display time longer than the first variable display time,
Within the second variable display time or during the second variation display time under the condition that the continuous discharge of the game balls toward the variable winning a prize port (for example, the second special winning a prize port C20) is continued while the specific game state is maintained. Two or more game balls can enter the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) within the variable display time of the second identification information when the number of holdings is equal to or more than the specific number. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (9),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A specific ball entrance into which a game ball can enter (for example, auxiliary game starting port H10),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s), the right to shift to the second special game which is advantageous to the player is given. Second special game state transition right granting means (eg, special game control means MP30) to be granted,
After the right to transfer to the second special game is granted, the second special game that executes the second special game when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10) Control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls the game to be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached in advance, and according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device). When the second identification information is variably displayed in B20), it is configured such that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific aspect after the variably displayed, and the variability is set. When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed under the situation where the continuous discharge of the game balls toward the winning a prize mouth (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) is executed, the executed variable winning a prize mouth opening game is executed. Based on the specific area (for example, V winning hole entrance detection device C22s) is configured to be substantially deterministic,
When the right to shift to the second special game is given, the right to shift to the second special game is given until the game ball enters the specific entrance (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10). When the execution of the second special game is awaited without exercising, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entrance (for example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10), to the given second special game. Pachinko gaming machine, characterized in that it is configured to exercise the right to shift to start execution of the second special game.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, the second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, a V winning hole entrance detecting device C22s) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information,
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects (for example, effect display device SG),
And a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
According to the determination content based on the first random number, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) is controlled to variably display the first identification information and then stop the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
According to the content determined based on the second random number, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the second identification information in a variable manner and then stop the second identification information. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
When the variable winning a prize opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning a prize entrance detecting device C22s), the second special game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be opened, and a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means) that controls so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. MP50),
Game information transmission means (for example, game information transmission control) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side. Means MT) and
A unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific game state, and the one unit is predetermined. When played a number of times, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
When the specific game state is set after the execution of the first special game and/or the second special game, the number of times set as the predetermined number of times is variable.
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display content control unit (for example, the effect display content control unit that controls the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
When the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is scheduled during the period in which the specific game state is maintained, it is scheduled after the completion of the second special game based on the scheduled variable winning opening opening game. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured to be able to notify the number of times in advance.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (11),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a first winning a prize opening C10, a second winning a prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20) capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is determined according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display section A21g). )When,
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of balls have entered the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or a predetermined time has passed. Until that time, the first special game capable of executing the first special game in which the unit winning game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times is executed. Control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the second acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or a predetermined time has passed. Until that, the second special game capable of executing the second special game in which the unit special game that makes the variable special winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) advantageous to the player is executed once is executed. Second special game control means (for example, small hit game control means MP40) for executing
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) has a variable game (for example, the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal game state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is provided with a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling the special game state after the execution of the first special game,
The second hold can occur until it reaches a predetermined number, and a second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the second hold. If the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is substantially determined that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variably displayed.
When there are a plurality of second holdings and the second special game is executed a plurality of times in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the plurality of second holdings, the first time When the game balls are continuously shot after the execution of the second special game is started until the end of the execution of the second special game which is the final time, (2) A pachinko game machine characterized in that the total number of prize balls given to a player by executing a special game is configured to be larger.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A 1st main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game startup opening ball entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entry Ball mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C10 First prize winning entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance determination means MJ11-V V Prize winning entrance determination means, MJ20 Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21- A 1st main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 hold control means MJ31 hold digestion control means, MJ31j Change start condition satisfaction determination Means MJ32 symbol holding means, MJ32-A first main game symbol holding means MJ32b-A first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information Temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determining means MN10 win/loss lottery means, MN11-A first main game win/win lottery means MN11ta-A first main Game win/loss lottery table, MN11-B Second main game win/loss lottery means MN11ta-B Second main game win/loss lottery table, MN11-H Auxiliary game win/loss lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win/loss lottery table, MN20 Special game shift Determining means MN30 variation fixed control means, MN30t variation fixed time timer MN40 symbol content determining means, MN41-A first main game symbol determining means MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B second main gaming symbol Determination means MN41ta-B second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, MN50 variation mode determination means MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means , MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta -H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN60 distribution part object control means, MN60b distribution part related information temporary storage means MN60t distribution part operation timer, MP game progression means MP10 display control means, MP11-C 1st・Second main game diagram Pattern control means MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B 2nd main game starting port electric accessory Opening and closing control means MP21-B second main game starting opening electric auditors opening and closing condition determining means, MP22t-B second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP30 special game control means, MP31 condition judging means MP32 special game content determining means , MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize mouth electric auditors opening/closing control means MP33c Prize ball counter, MP34 special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP40 small hit Game control means MP41t small hit game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP52 time saving end condition determination means, MP52c time saving counter MB game state temporary storage means, MB10 -C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start opening A11s 1 main game start mouth entrance detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first main game symbol display part, A21h first main game symbol hold display part B second main game peripheral device, B10 second main game start Mouth B11s second main game start mouth entrance detection device, B11d second main game start mouth electric accessory B20 second main game symbol display device, B21g second main game symbol display portion B21h second main game symbol hold display portion, C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device C10 1st big winning opening, C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning opening C21s 2nd big winning opening winning Detecting device, C21d 2nd prize hole Electric prize C22 V prize hole, C22s V prize hole entrance detecting device C23 Sorting prize object, H auxiliary game peripheral device H10 auxiliary game starting port, H11s auxiliary game starting port ball detecting device H20 auxiliary game symbol display device, H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display section, S sub-control board SM effect display control means (sub-main control board), SM10 display information receiving means SM11b main side information temporary storage means, SM20 effect display control means SM21 decorative symbol display control means, SM21n equipment Drawing display content determination means SM21ta Drawing variation determination lottery table, SM21b Installation drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t Installation drawing variation time management timer, SM22 Installation drawing pending information display control means SM22b Installation drawing pending information temporary storage means, SM23 Background Effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM26 Right hitting instruction display control means, SM27 V winning detection effect display control means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means, SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit)
SS10 sub information transmission/reception control means, SS20 image display control means SS21b image display related information temporary storage means, SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative design display area SG12 first hold display section, SG13 second hold display section KH prize ball Payout control board, KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter the ball compared to the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can be opened and closed,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information,
With a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening,
According to the determination content based on the first random number, a first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display unit to variably display the first identification information and then stop the first identification information.
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
According to the determination content based on the second random number, a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display unit to variably display the second identification information and then stop the second identification information.
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game control means for executing a variable winning opening opening game capable of changing the variable winning opening from the closed state to the open state,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area, a second special game control means for executing a second special game that is advantageous to the player,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, it has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in an open state than in the normal game state, after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. In, a game state transition control means for controlling to be in a specific game state,
A unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the first special game and the second special game are not executed in the specific game state, and the one unit is predetermined. When played a number of times, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
It has a plurality of types of times set as the predetermined number of times,
When the unit from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display is one unit A and the unit from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one unit B,
In the specific gaming state, the one unit B is not performed, and when the one unit A is played a first predetermined number of times, it can be in the normal gaming state, while in the specific gaming state, the one unit A is Is configured to be in the normal game state even when the one unit B is played a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times,
It is possible to display an instruction effect for instructing the shooting direction of the game ball on a predetermined effect display unit,
The instruction effect A and the instruction effect B are provided as the instruction effects, and the instruction effect A and the instruction effect B indicate the same firing direction but have different display modes.
The instruction effect A can be displayed during execution of the variable winning opening opening game, but the instruction effect A cannot be displayed during execution of the second special game, while the instruction effect B can be displayed. being configured,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, not only the instruction effect A but also the instruction effect B can be displayed at the same time, and the instruction effect A and the instruction effect B are displayed during the execution of the variable prize opening game. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the instruction display A and the instruction display B are not overlapped when they are displayed at the same time .

Images